MAYBACH
Order No. 6515 4424 13 Part No. 240 584 76 81 USA Edition A 2006
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Grafik in der Größe 216x79 mm
in den Grafikrahmen importieren!
Maybach 57
Maybach 62
Maybach 57 S
Our company congratulates you on the
purchase of your new Maybach.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in Maybach
Manufaktur. Furthermore, it exemplifies
your desire to own an automobile that
will be as easy as possible to operate and
provide years of service.
Your Maybach represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen.
To help assure your driving pleasure and
also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:
Please read this manual carefully,
then return it to your vehicle where it
will be handy for your reference.
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Maybach.
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve
the safety of the vehicle operator and
occupants.
Should you have any questions,
please contact your Maybach Studio
MRM (Maybach Relationship
Manager) or call us at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
We extend our best wishes for many
miles of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Product information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Service and warranty
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Maybach automobiles . . . . . . . . . 11
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Change of address or ownership . 12
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Where to find it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Operating safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Proper use of the vehicle . . . . . . . 16
Problems with your vehicle . . . . . . . . 17
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 18
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . 18
Vehicle data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Information regarding electronic
recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . .
Front center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver’s door control panel . . . . . . . . .
Rear passenger compartment . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 (vehicles without
rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 (vehicles with
rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 without partition* . .
Maybach 62 with partition* . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear center seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 with power
tilt/sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 with
electrotransparent roof* . . . . . . . .
21
22
24
26
27
27
28
30
31
32
32
34
36
38
40
40
42
44
44
46
48
48
51
54
Rear door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking with the SmartKey. . . .
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO**. . .
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching on headlamps . . . . . . . .
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems while driving . . . . . . . . .
Parking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching off headlamps . . . . . . .
Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . .
Releasing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
60
60
61
62
65
65
68
70
72
72
74
77
77
78
79
80
82
83
83
84
84
85
86
Contents
Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 98
Override switch for rear
passenger compartment . . . . . . . 105
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Electro-hydraulic brake system. . 112
Anti-theft systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . 115
Tow-away alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Locking and unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . 120
SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** . . 124
Opening the doors from
the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Closing the rear doors
automatically from the inside
(Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Closing the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Trunk emergency release . . . . . . . 136
Valet trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Power closing assist for doors
and trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Automatic central locking . . . . . . 138
Locking and unlocking from
the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Setting front passenger seat
position from rear . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Multicontour seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Seat ventilation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Memory function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing positions in memory . . . .
Recalling positions from memory
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . .
Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Cornering lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . .
Interior lighting in the front . . . .
Interior lighting in the rear . . . . .
Courtesy lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door entry lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster illumination .
Coolant temperature gauge . . . .
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature indicator . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
153
153
154
155
155
159
159
161
162
163
168
168
168
169
169
170
171
171
171
172
172
Contents
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction steering wheel . .
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard display menu. . . . . . . .
Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone menu. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distronic** menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip computer menu. . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle status message
memory menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . .
Gear selector lever position . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic shift program . . . . . .
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . .
Emergency operation
(Limp-home Mode) . . . . . . . . . . .
Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp cleaning system. . . . .
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power folding exterior rear
view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window defroster. . . . . . . .
173
173
174
176
178
179
181
184
184
185
186
187
197
199
201
202
203
204
205
206
206
206
208
210
211
Automatic climate control. . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating the climate
control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the climate control
system in automatic mode. . . . . .
Setting the temperature . . . . . . .
Adjusting air distribution . . . . . .
Adjusting air volume . . . . . . . . . .
Front defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL . . .
Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . .
Charcoal filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residual heat and ventilation . . .
Temperature-controlled
glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating rear passenger
compartment settings at the
cockpit control panel . . . . . . . . . .
Rear passenger compartment . . .
Activating the climate
control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the climate control
system in automatic mode. . . . . .
Setting the temperature . . . . . . .
Adjusting air distribution . . . . . .
Adjusting air volume . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
213
215
215
216
216
216
217
217
218
219
221
222
223
223
224
229
229
229
230
231
231
Residual heat and ventilation. . .
Solar panel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the
power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing the power
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summer opening feature . . . . . .
Convenience closing feature. . . .
Power tilt/sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the
power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the
power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrotransparent roof* . . . . . . . . .
Operating the
electrotransparent roof. . . . . . . .
232
232
233
233
235
235
236
237
237
239
240
244
245
245
Contents
Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distronic**. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airmatic DC (Dual Control). . . . .
Parktronic system
(Parking assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Assist System (PAS) . . . .
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo tie-down hooks . . . . . . . .
Loading instructions . . . . . . . . . .
Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartments . . . . . . . .
Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighters . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-smokers package*. . . . . . . .
Folding table*
(standard on Maybach 62;
optional on Maybach 57) . . . . . .
248
248
251
263
267
272
280
280
280
281
281
282
293
294
295
298
299
301
302
Refrigerator** in rear
center console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Battery charge socket. . . . . . . . . . 306
Rear window curtain . . . . . . . . . . 307
Rear door window curtains* . . . . 309
Partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Two-way intercom*
(Maybach 62: standard with
partition*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
External communication
(special order equipment) . . . . . . 317
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . 318
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Garage door opener. . . . . . . . . . . 335
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) . . . . .
Driving instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive sensibly – save fuel . . . . . . .
Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving instructions . . . . .
Standing water . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger compartment . . . . . . .
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control and operation of
radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . .
341
342
343
343
343
343
344
344
346
346
347
347
348
348
349
350
350
350
350
351
351
352
Contents
At the gas station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check regularly and before
a long trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission fluid level . . . . . . .
Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system . . . . .
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important guidelines . . . . . . . . .
Tire care and maintenance. . . . .
Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . .
Loading the vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended tire
inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure.
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
353
353
355
356
356
357
360
361
362
363
364
364
365
367
367
373
375
380
Load identification. . . . . . . . . . . .
DOT, Tire Identification
Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum tire load. . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum tire inflation pressure.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles) . . . . . . .
Tire ply material . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and loading terminology . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire speed rating for winter tires
Winter tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance service indicator
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator display. . . . . . . .
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and care of vehicle . . . .
384
385
386
387
387
389
390
393
394
394
395
395
396
396
397
398
399
399
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What to do if … . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps in instrument cluster . . . .
Lamp in center console . . . . . . . .
Vehicle status messages in
the multifunction display . . . . . .
Where will I find ...? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit,
luggage bowl, spare wheel. . . . .
Unlocking/locking in an emergency.
Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . .
Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening/closing in an emergency . .
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing SmartKey batteries . . . . .
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .
License plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .
409
410
410
416
417
451
451
451
452
452
453
454
454
455
456
458
459
460
463
Contents
Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . .
Removing wiper blades . . . . . . .
Installing wiper blades . . . . . . . .
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the spare wheel . . . . .
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting the batteries . . . .
Charging and reinstalling
the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconnecting the batteries . . . .
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing towing eye bolt. . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aids for replacing fuses . . . . . . .
Fuse boxes in engine
compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse box in passenger
compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse box in the trunk . . . . . . . . .
464
464
465
466
466
466
471
473
474
475
476
478
480
481
482
482
483
483
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Warranty coverage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet. . . . . . . . . . . 487
Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Layout of poly-V-belt drive . . . . . . . . 489
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Rims and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Same size tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Main dimensions and weights. . . . . . 494
Main dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. . . . . . 495
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Engine oils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . 496
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . 497
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Coolants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Windshield and headlamp washer
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine Parts as
well as conversion parts and accessories
explicitly approved for use on Maybach
vehicles and your model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Maybach vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment
for other products and therefore cannot
be held responsible for them, even if in
individual cases an official approval or
authorization by governmental or other
agencies should exist. Use of such parts
and accessories could adversely affect
the safety, performance or reliability of
your vehicle. Please do not use them.
Genuine Parts as well as conversion parts
and accessories approved by us for use
on Maybach vehicles are available at
your authorized Maybach Studio where
you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation
will be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you
to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service
life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow
the instructions and warnings contained
in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage
caused by failure to follow instructions is
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your
authorized Maybach Studio will be glad
to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore,
information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Maybach, including:
New Car Limited Warranty
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly
from the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Emission System Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts,
and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts,
and Vermont only)
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)
If there are any equipment details that
are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Maybach
Studio will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents
and should be kept with the vehicle.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Maybach
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled
to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price,
if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to
fix one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts.
During the period of 18 months from
original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles (approximately 29000 km) on the odometer of
the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if
one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject
to repair two or more times, and you
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC in writing of the need for its
repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have
directly notified us in writing of the
need for its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should be sent to us,
not a Maybach Studio, at Maybach
Assistance Center, Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC, Three Paragon Drive, Montvale,
NJ 07645.
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
The Maintenance Booklet describes all
the necessary maintenance work which
should be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet
with you when you take the vehicle to
your authorized Maybach Studio for service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The Maybach Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls
to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA)
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada)
will be answered by Maybach Assistance
Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year.
For additional information refer to the
Maybach Roadside Assistance Program
brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio.
12
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Maybach Assistance Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). It is in your
own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
If you sell your Maybach, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it
available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure
to send in the “Notice of Purchase of
Used Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Maybach Assistance Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
Certain Maybach models are available
for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
an authorized Maybach Studio or write
to:
Service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available.
Unleaded gasoline for vehicles with
catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Gasoline may have a considerably
lower octane rating, and improper
fuel can cause engine damage.
In Canada:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to
provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each
section has its own reference color.
At a glance
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your
vehicle. This section expands on the
“Getting started” section and also describes technical innovations.
All important technical data for your
Maybach can be found in this section.
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated in the vehicle’s interior.
Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information
you need for the proper operation of
your Maybach.
Here you will find all the information
you need for your first drive.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the
safety and security features of your
Maybach.
14
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of
the most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are
designed to help you find information
quickly and easily.
The following publications are part of
your vehicle documentation:
Practical hints
this Operator’s Manual
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
Trademarks:
Bluetooth®
is a registered trademark
of Bluetooth SIG Inc.
ESP® is a registered trademark of
DaimlerChrysler.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of
Siemens Automotive Corp.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your
Maybach.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or
life, or the health or life of others.
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
A number of these symbols appear-
ing in succession indicates a multiplestep procedure.
page
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
i
Helpful hints or further information
you may find useful.
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information
on a topic.
This continuation symbol
marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued
on the next page.
->
In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term
definitions.
DISPLAY
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
** Two asterisks designate standard
equipment which the purchaser of
the vehicle had the option to delete
at the time the vehicle was ordered.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software
could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components
are interconnected, any modifications
made may produce an undesired effect on
other systems. Electronic malfunctions
could seriously impair the operating safety
of your vehicle.
See an authorized Maybach Studio for repairs or modifications to electronic components.
Other improper work or modifications on
the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while
the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when
running over an obstacle, road debris or a
pothole, may cause serious damage and
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
that damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on your hazard warning
flashers, carefully slow down, and drive
with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or other
qualified maintenance or repair facility for
further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that
you are familiar with the following information and rules:
the safety precautions in this manual
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
traffic rules and regulations
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to
your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of
various risks. You should not remove any
of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels
may cause you and others to be unaware
of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge
you to immediately contact your Maybach Relationship Manager at an authorized Maybach Studio to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Maybach
Studio management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Maybach Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Three Paragon Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant
to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
Maybach Studio, the Maybach Assistance Center, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid
system, may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system.
19
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Front center console
Overhead control panel
Driver’s door control panel
Rear passenger compartment
Rear seats
Rear center seat*
Rear center console
Rear door control panel
21
At a glance
Cockpit
22
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
1 Exterior lamp switch
2 Headlamp washer button
Page
78,
155
206
High beam
79
Turn signals
79
Windshield wipers
80
4 Cruise control lever
Cruise control
248
Distronic**
251
5 Multifunction steering
wheel
68,
174
6 Horn
24,
169
Page
8 Lever for voice control system, see separate operating instructions
9 Starter switch
3 Combination switch
7 Instrument cluster
Item
62
Item
Page
e Glove box lid release
283
f Glove box lock
283
g Front center console
27
68
a Front Parktronic warning
indicator
269
h Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
b Air vent grille with storage
box
282
j Heated steering wheel
switch
318
k Remote trunk opening/closing switch
132
c Overhead control panel
30
d Compartment for front
telephone
284,
320
The Roadside Assistance
button • and the Information button ¡ are located in the compartment
for front telephone.
330
l Parking brake pedal
m Hood lock release
83
356
n Parking brake release
83
o Door control panel
31
23
At a glance
Instrument cluster
24
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
Item
1 Coolant temperature
gauge
170
a A
2 Fuel gauge with fuel
reserve warning lamp
410
3 L
Left turn signal indicator lamp
4 Speedometer
5 v
ABS/ESP®
lamp
6 l
7 K
1
Distance warning
lamp1
Right turn signal indicator lamp
107,
109,
410
251,
411
79
8 Tachometer
171
9 -
107,
411
Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator
lamp
Item
High beam headlamp indicator lamp
159
k H
b J
Reset button
169
169
c <
Seat belt telltale
94,
412
l Knob for instrument cluster
illumination
m ?
Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, USA
only
415
±
Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, Canada only
415
n ;
Brake warning lamp,
USA only
414
3
Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
414
o 1
Supplemental
Restraint System
(SRS) indicator lamp
88,
413
79
172
warning
Page
d Digital clock
(see separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
e Gear selector lever position
and program mode
198
f Main odometer
173
g Trip odometer
171
h Multifunction display
173
j Outside temperature indicator
171
Page
Tire inflation pressure warning lamp
412
Vehicles without Distronic**: Warning lamp
without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is
running.
25
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
Page
1 Multifunction display
Operating control system
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
174
Page
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è
for next menu
ÿ
for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
æ
up/to increase
Press button
ç
down/to decrease
j
for next display
k
for previous display
3 Telephone:
Press button
26
173
Item
s
to take a call
to dial a call
t
to end a call
to reject an
incoming call
At a glance
Front center console
Front center console
Upper part
Item
Page
Item
1 Hazard warning flasher on/
off switch
161
7 Automatic climate control
2 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp
116
8 Chrome label for opening
cover of:
3 Central locking switch
139
4 Central unlocking switch
139
5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
101
6 COMAND (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
Page
212
Cup holders
295
Button for opening/closing rear window curtain
307
Button for opening/closing rear door window
curtains*
309
27
At a glance
Front center console
Lower part
Maybach 57 and Maybach 62 without
partition*
Item
Page
1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button
63,
76
2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission
75
3 Parking Assist System (PAS)
parallel parking button
277
4 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints
145
5 Parking assist (Parktronic
system) deactivation button
270
6 Two-way intercom* on/off
button (only Maybach 62)
315
Item
Page
7 Chrome label for opening
cover of:
Ashtray
298
Lighter
300
Storage compartment*
301
8 Thumbwheel for setting
distance in Distronic**
259
9 Distance warning function** on/off button
259
a Level control button
266
b Airmatic DC button
264
c Electronic Stability Program
(ESP®) control switch
111
d Program mode selector
switch for automatic transmission
203
i
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
28
At a glance
Front center console
Maybach 62 with partition*
Item
Page
Item
1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button
63,
76
8 Partition* opening/closing
button
2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission
75
9 Chrome label for opening
cover of:
3 Parking Assist System (PAS)
parallel parking button
277
4 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints
145
5 Parking assist (Parktronic
system) deactivation button
270
6 Two-way intercom on/off
button
315
7 Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
314
Page
312
Ashtray
298
Lighter
300
Storage compartment*
301
a Thumbwheel for setting
distance in Distronic**
259
b Distance warning function** on/off button
259
c Level control button
266
d Airmatic DC button
264
e Electronic Stability Program
(ESP®) control switch
111
f Program mode selector
switch for automatic transmission
203
i
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
29
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Item
30
Page
1 Left front reading lamp
on/off
162
2 Rear interior lighting on/off
162
3 Interior lighting control
162
4 Right front reading lamp
on/off
162
5 Front interior lighting
on/off
162
6 Tow-away alarm button
117
7 Rear view mirror
70,
206
8 Garage door opener
335
9 Auto-dimming function on/
off
206
Item
Page
a Hands-free microphone for:
Telephone
319
Tele Aid (emergency call
system)
325
Voice control system,
see separate operating
instructions
b Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
325
c Switch for opening/closing
power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57)
237
Switch for opening/closing
power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62)
240
Switch for operating
electrotransparent roof*
screen
245
At a glance
Driver’s door control panel
Driver’s door control panel
Item
Page
1 Inside door handle
130
2 Memory function (for storing seat, mirror and steering wheel settings)
154
3 Seat adjustment
Item
Page
7 Override switch for rear
passenger compartment
105
8 Switches for opening/closing rear door windows
233
209
9 Button for opening storage
compartment
285
4 Button for folding exterior
mirrors in and out
285
5 Exterior mirror adjustment
70
a Handle for opening storage
compartment
6 Switches for opening/closing front door windows
233
b Seat ventilation*
151
c Seat heating
150
65
31
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear center seat*)
32
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Vanity mirror, left
281
5 Vanity mirror, right
2 Speedometer
172
3 Clock (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
172
6 Video monitor, right (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
289
4 Outside temperature
gauge
171
7 Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, right
8 Automatic climate control
panel
289
281
Item
Page
9 Button for opening storage
compartment/drawer
287
a Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, left
289
b Video monitor, left (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
33
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*)
34
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item
Page
Item
Page
Item
1 Vanity mirror, left
281
5 Vanity mirror, right
2 Speedometer
172
3 Clock (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
172
6 Video monitor, right (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
289
4 Outside temperature
gauge
171
7 Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, right
a Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, left
8 Automatic climate control
panel
228
b Video monitor, left (separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System
operating instructions)
281
9 Vehicles with rear center
seat*: control panel for rear
functions in rear center
console
Page
49
289
35
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Maybach 62 without partition*
36
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item
Page
1 Vanity mirror, left
281
2 Speedometer
172
3 Clock (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
172
4 Outside temperature
gauge
171
5 Vanity mirror, right
281
Item
Page
6 Video monitor, right (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
Item
Page
a Button for opening storage
compartment/drawer
287
Vehicles with rear center
seat*: control panel for rear
functions in the storage
compartment/drawer
52,
55
7 Button for opening upper
storage compartment
289
8 Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, right
289
b Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, left
9 Automatic climate control
panel
228
c Video monitor, left (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
289
37
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Maybach 62 with partition*
38
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item
Page
1 Vanity mirror, left
281
2 Speedometer
172
3 Clock (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
172
4 Outside temperature
gauge
5 Vanity mirror, right
Item
Page
6 Video monitor, right (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
Item
Page
a Button for opening storage
compartment/drawer
287
Vehicles with rear center
seat*: control panel for rear
functions in the storage
compartment/drawer
52,
55
7 Button for opening upper
storage compartment
288
171
8 Storage pocket, right
290
b Storage pocket, left
228
281
9 Automatic climate control
panel
c Video monitor, left (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
290
39
At a glance
Rear seats
Maybach 57
40
At a glance
Rear seats
Item
Page
1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator
269
2 Button for opening upper
storage compartment with
insert for two champagne
flutes
290
3 Chrome label for opening
DVD player, AUX sockets
and headphone jacks (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
290
4 Chrome label for opening
CD changer compartment
(see separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
290
Item
5 Chrome label for opening
middle storage compartment
6 Door control panel, left
Page
290
57
7 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for headphones
285
8 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
285
9 Center armrest with
Item
a Rear center console
Page
48
b Rear-cabin cup holder
295
c 12-V socket
305
d Adjustment switch for left
multicontour seat
148
e Folding table*
302
f Folding table*
302
g Adjustment switch for right
multicontour seat
148
Storage compartment
for telephone
323
h Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
285
Storage compartment
underneath
290
285
Refrigerator** underneath
303
j Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for headphones
k Door control panel, right
57
41
At a glance
Rear seats
Maybach 62
42
At a glance
Rear seats
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator
269
6 Door control panel, left
285
2 Button for opening upper
storage compartment with
insert for two champagne
flutes
290
7 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for headphones
8 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
285
3 Chrome label for opening
DVD player, AUX sockets
and headphone jacks (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
290
4 Chrome label for opening
CD changer compartment
(see separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
290
5 Chrome label for opening
middle storage compartment
290
58
Item
d Rear center console
Page
48
e Rear-cabin cup holder
295
f 12-V socket
305
g Folding table
302
h Folding table
302
148
9 Button for opening storage
compartment
286
j Adjustment switch for right
multicontour seat
a Storage compartment
286
285
b Adjustment switch for left
multicontour seat
148
k Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for headphones
c Center armrest with
323
l Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
285
m Button for opening storage
compartment
286
n Storage compartment
286
Storage compartment
for telephone
Storage compartment
underneath
290
Refrigerator** underneath
303
o Door control panel, right
58
43
At a glance
Rear center seat*
Maybach 57
44
At a glance
Rear center seat*
Item
1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator
Page
269
2 Rear center backrest
DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets
and headphone jacks located behind backrest
(see separate COMAND
and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating
instructions)
292
Storage compartment
between the rear outer
seats located behind
backrest
292
Center armrest with
storage compartment
for telephone (backrest
folded down)
323
Item
Page
Vehicles with rear center seat*: Center armrest with storage
compartment (backrest
folded down) for
telephone and
control panel for
rear functions
3 Door control panel, left
323
49
57
Item
Page
7 Adjustment switch for left
multicontour seat
148
8 12-V socket
305
9 Switch for rear center seat
head restraints
146
a Cup holder
296
b Adjustment switch for right
multicontour seat
148
4 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for headphones
285
c Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for ashtray
285
5 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for ashtray
285
d Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for headphones
285
6 Cup holder
296
e Door control panel, right
57
45
At a glance
Rear center seat*
Maybach 62
46
At a glance
Rear center seat*
Item
1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator
Page
269
2 Rear center backrest
DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets
and headphone jacks located behind backrest
(see separate COMAND
and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating
instructions)
292
Storage compartment
between the rear outer
seats located behind
backrest
292
Center armrest with
storage compartment
for telephone (backrest
folded down)
323
Item
Page
Vehicles with rear center seat*: Center armrest with storage
compartment (backrest
folded down) for
telephone and
323
control panel for
rear functions
52,
55
3 Door control panel, left
58
Item
Page
8 Storage compartment
286
9 Cup holder
296
a 12-V socket
305
b Switch for rear center seat
head restraints
146
c Cup holder
296
d Adjustment switch for right
multicontour seat
149
4 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for headphones
285
e Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for headphones
285
5 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for ashtray
285
f Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for ashtray
285
6 Adjustment switch for left
multicontour seat
149
g Button for opening storage
compartment
286
7 Button for opening storage
compartment
286
h Storage compartment
286
j Door control panel, right
58
47
At a glance
Rear center console
Maybach 57
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
163
2 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
325
3 Right reading lamp on/off
163
4 Ambient lighting on/off
163
Rear interior lamps on/off
163
5 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting
163
6 Cover of compartment
with:
Example with rear door window curtains*
i
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
48
Ashtray
298
Lighter
300
Storage compartment*
301
Item
Page
7 Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
309
8 Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain (only if
equipped with rear door
window curtains*)
307
9 Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
309
a Rear interior lamps on/off
163
Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain (only if
not equipped with rear
door window curtains*)
307
b Central unlocking switch
139
c Central locking switch
139
At a glance
Rear center console
Control panel for rear functions* in rear
center console (vehicles with rear center
seat*)
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
163
2 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
325
3 Right reading lamp on/off
163
4 Ambient lighting on/off
163
Rear interior lamps on/off
163
5 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting
163
Item
6 Rear interior lamps on/off
Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain (only if
not equipped with rear
door window curtains*)
Page
163
307
7 Central locking switch
139
8 Central unlocking switch
139
i
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
49
At a glance
Rear center console
Control panel for rear window curtains*
in rear armrest compartment (vehicles
with rear center seat*)
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
50
Item
Page
1 Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
309
2 Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain (only if
equipped with rear door
window curtains*)
307
3 Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
309
At a glance
Rear center console
Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding
sunroof
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
165
2 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
325
3 Right reading lamp on/off
165
4 Ambient lighting on/off
165
5 Headliner lamps and pillar
uplights on/off
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
Page
a Switch for raising/lowering
power tilt/sliding sunroof
242
b Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
309
165
c Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain
307
6 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights
165
d Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
309
312
7 Two-way intercom* volume
thumbwheel
315
e Button for opening/closing
partition*
f Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
312
g Two-way intercom*
on/off button
315
h Rear interior lamps on/off
165
j Central unlocking switch
139
k Central locking switch
139
8 Cover of compartment
with:
i
Item
Ashtray
298
Lighter
300
Storage compartment*
301
9 Switch for opening/closing
power tilt/sliding sunroof
242
51
At a glance
Rear center console
Control panel for rear functions* in storage compartment/drawer (vehicles with
rear center seat*)
i
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
52
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
325
7 Two-way intercom*
on/off button
315
2 Right reading lamp on/off
165
8 Rear interior lamps on/off
165
3 Ambient lighting on/off
165
9 Central locking switch
139
4 Headliner lamps and pillar
uplights on/off
165
a Central unlocking switch
139
b Left reading lamp on/off
165
5 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights
165
6 Two-way intercom* volume
thumbwheel
315
c Remote control (see separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System
operating instructions)
At a glance
Rear center console
Control panel for rear functions* in rear
armrest compartment (vehicles with rear
center seat*)
Item
Page
1 Switch for opening/closing
power tilt/sliding sunroof
242
2 Switch for raising/lowering
power tilt/sliding sunroof
Item
Page
309
242
5 Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
312
3 Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
309
6 Button for opening/closing
partition*
7 Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
312
4 Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain
307
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
i
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
53
At a glance
Rear center console
Maybach 62 with electrotransparent
roof*
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
166
2 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
325
3 Right reading lamp on/off
166
4 Ambient lighting on/off
166
5 Roof lighting on/off
166
6 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting or roof
lighting
7 Two-way intercom* volume
thumbwheel
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
54
Page
a Switch for making electrotransparent roof*
opaque/transparent
246
b Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
309
c Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain
307
166
309
315
d Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
e Button for opening/closing
partition*
312
f Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
312
g Two-way intercom*
on/off button
315
h Rear interior lamps on/off
166
j Central unlocking switch
139
k Central locking switch
139
8 Cover of compartment
with:
i
Item
Ashtray
298
Lighter
300
Storage compartment*
301
9 Switch for opening/closing
electrotransparent roof*
screen
246
At a glance
Rear center console
Control panel for rear functions* in storage compartment/drawer (vehicles with
rear center seat*)
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
325
7 Two-way intercom*
on/off button
315
2 Right reading lamp on/off
166
8 Rear interior lamps on/off
166
3 Ambient lighting on/off
166
9 Central locking switch
139
4 Roof lighting on/off
166
a Central unlocking switch
139
5 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting or roof
lighting
166
b Left reading lamp on/off
166
6 Two-way intercom* volume
thumbwheel
315
c Remote control (see separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System
operating instructions)
i
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
55
At a glance
Rear center console
Control panel for rear functions* in rear
armrest compartment (vehicles with rear
center seat*)
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
i
Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons
may vary.
56
Item
Page
1 Switch for opening/closing
electrotransparent roof*
screen
246
2 Switch for making electrotransparent roof*
opaque/transparent
246
3 Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
309
Item
Page
4 Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain
307
5 Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
309
6 Button for opening/closing
partition*
312
7 Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
312
At a glance
Rear door control panel
Rear door control panel
Maybach 57
Item
1
Page
1 Selection switch for right
front passenger seat adjustment1
147
2 Selection switch for right
rear seat adjustment1
147
3 Memory button for storing
rear seat positions
154
4 Inside door handle
130
5 Seat ventilation*
151
6 Seat heating
150
7 Seat adjustment
142
8 Switches for opening/closing rear door window
233
These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only.
57
At a glance
Rear door control panel
Maybach 62
Item
1
58
Page
1 Selection switch for right
front passenger seat adjustment1
147
2 Selection switch for right
rear seat adjustment1
147
3 Memory button for storing
rear seat positions
154
4 Inside door handle
130
5 Switch for moving seat to
fully reclined position
143
6 Seat ventilation*
151
7 Seat heating
150
8 Switch for moving seat to
upright position
143
9 Seat adjustment
143
a Switches for opening/closing rear door window
233
These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only.
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
59
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides
an overview of the vehicle’s most basic
functions.
Press unlock button Πon the
Unlocking with the SmartKey
SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in
the doors move up. The anti-theft
alarm system is disarmed.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls
in detail” section will provide you with
further information. The corresponding
page references are located at the end of
each segment.
i
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
activated ( page 112).
Get in the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
SmartKey with remote control
1
2
3
4
 Panic button ( page 106)
Š Opening button for trunk
ΠUnlock button
‹ Lock button
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
60
For more information, see “SmartKey”
( page 120).
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO**
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock and unlock the vehicle without using the remote control buttons on the
SmartKey and start the engine without
inserting the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
i
To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the
vehicle, no further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away from the
door.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Grasp an outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in
the doors move up. The anti-theft
alarm system is disarmed.
i
If the vehicle has been parked for
more than 72 hours, you must pull an
outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
i
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
activated ( page 112).
Get in the vehicle.
For more information, see “SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO**” ( page 124).
61
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
0
For removing SmartKey
i
1
Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2
Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position.
All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal
indicator lamps unless activated) in
the instrument come on. If a lamp in
the instrument cluster fails to come
on when the ignition is switched on,
have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the
engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster”
( page 410).
When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except
high beam headlamp indicator lamp
and turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out
when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are
operational.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
SmartKey
3
Starter switch
62
Starting position
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
Getting started
Unlocking
!
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
If the SmartKey can still not be
turned, the battery may not be sufficiently charged.
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey to the
various starter switch positions.
Check the starter battery and
charge it if necessary
( page 471).
Get a jump start ( page 476).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged
battery, always remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
If you firmly depress the brake pedal during pressing KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the engine starts automatically.
i
The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS-GO function.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
For information on starting the engine
using the SmartKey, see “Starting with
the SmartKey” ( page 75).
63
Getting started
Unlocking
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
Make sure the gear selector lever is
set to P.
Do not depress the brake pedal.
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey
removed).
Position 1
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
This supplies power for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
64
once again, the ignition
(position 2) is switched on
twice, the power supply is again
switched off
Ignition (or position 2)
i
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power
supply is again switched off.
twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers.
All lamps in the instrument cluster
(except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) come on. If a
lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
come on when the ignition is
switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” ( page 410).
i
When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except
high beam headlamp indicator lamp
and turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out
when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are
operational.
For information on starting the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO**”
( page 75).
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel,
and rear view mirror adjustments, as well
as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion.
Seats
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the
seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If
you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly
positioned on the body.
Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear
cabin) can be used in a reclined position
with seat belts properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in
the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a belt
system and kinematic electronic controls
that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in
all seat settings in the event of a collision
or similar situation.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt ( page 72).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the power seats can be operated when the
respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
65
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a
Maybach authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the
BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front
airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated
in an appropriate infant or child restraint
system, which is properly secured with the
vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or
secured via lower anchors and top tether
strap, fully in accordance with the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
66
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint.
Seat adjustment
The seat adjustment switches are located
on each door.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
or
Open the respective door.
i
The memory function ( page 152)
lets you store settings for the seat positions together with the settings for
the steering wheel and rear view mirrors.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat height
Seat cushion tilt
Seat backrest tilt
Seat cushion depth
Head restraint height
Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear
as possible, corresponding to the
driver’s ability to properly operate
the controls.
!
When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise you
could damage the seats.
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat height
Head restraint height
Press switch up or down in direction
Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 2.
Seat cushion tilt
Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 3 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
Seat backrest tilt
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 4 until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
Seat cushion depth
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 5 until your legs
are supported comfortably.
Head restraint tilt
of arrow 6.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
Push or pull on the lower edge of the
head restraint cushion.
i
Adjust the head restraint in such a
way that it is as close to the head as
possible.
For more information, see “Seats”
( page 141).
67
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel
Warning!
G
Steering wheel adjustment
i
The stalk is located on the lower lefthand side of the steering wheel.
The memory function ( page 152)
lets you store settings for the steering
wheel together with settings for the
rear view mirrors and seat positions.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. Adjusting the steering wheel
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Adjusting steering column in or out
Move stalk forward or backward in
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the steering wheel adjustment feature can
be operated when the driver’s door is
open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
68
direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is
reached with your arms slightly bent
at the elbow.
Adjusting steering column up or down
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or
down
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
or
Open the driver’s door.
Move the stalk up or down in direc-
tion of arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely and
that all of the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible.
For more information, see “Heated
steering wheel” ( page 318).
Getting started
Adjusting
Easy-entry/exit feature
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door
and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
This feature allows for easier entry into
and exit from the vehicle. When entering
and exiting the vehicle, the steering
wheel is in its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the CONVENIENCE
submenu of the control system
( page 196).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel will return to its
last set position when you
G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
Warning!
close the driver’s door with the ignition switched on
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO**
start/stop button ( page 63) once
with the driver’s door closed.
To stop steering wheel adjustment, do one
of the following:
i
Move steering column stalk
( page 68).
The last set steering wheel position is
stored when
Press seat adjustment switch
( page 66).
Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M
( page 153).
the ignition is switched off
the position is stored in memory
( page 153)
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards
when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch,
or
open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button in position 1 ( page 62).
i
If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no
longer be able to move upward when
the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly
interrupted when the engine is started.
69
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment
must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Warning!
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only
be completely removed while in their
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.
70
i
The memory function ( page 152)
lets you save the rear view mirror settings together with the settings for
the steering wheel and seat positions.
Interior rear view mirror
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view
mirrors” ( page 206).
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!
G
With the exterior rear view mirrors folded
in when driving the vehicle, you cannot
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
which could result in an accident. Before
driving the vehicle, make sure the exterior
rear view mirrors are folded out.
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press button 1 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 2
for the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror.
Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in
mirror are closer than they appear. Check
your interior rear view mirror or glance
over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
!
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button
3 Adjustment button
For information on how to reposition
the exterior mirror housing when it
was forcibly pushed forward (hit
from the rear) or forcibly pushed
rearward (hit from the front), see
“Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors” ( page 208).
i
At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
For more information, see “Rear view
mirrors” ( page 206).
71
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of
all obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer
brake or accelerate.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Due to the considerably larger interior
compared to other vehicles, for occupants
in the rear of the vehicle not properly
wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury
in an accident is significantly increased.
They are much more likely to be thrown
around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking
maneuvers.
72
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are wearing
your seat belt. The airbags can only provide the protection they were designed to
afford if the occupants are wearing their
seat belts ( page 88).
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a
Maybach authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the
BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the front passenger
airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated
in an appropriate infant or child restraint
system, which is properly secured with the
vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or
secured via lower anchors and top tether
strap, fully in accordance with the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Getting started
Driving
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt.
Warning!
Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear
cabin) can be used in a reclined position
with seat belts properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in
the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a belt
system and kinematic electronic controls
that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in
all seat settings in the event of a collision
or similar situation.
Keep the door storage compartments
closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to
catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt.
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the
seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If
you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
seat backrest and seat belt provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly
positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning
notices printed in the “Safety and Security” section ( page 92).
1
2
3
4
Seat belt outlet
Latch plate
Buckle
Release button
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the
seat belt outlet 1.
Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and
the lap portion across your hips.
Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 un
til it clicks.
73
Getting started
Driving
If necessary, tighten the lap portion
to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
Proper use of seat belts:
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it
should not touch the neck or pass under the arm).
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and
not across the abdomen.
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
Never use a seat belt for more than
one person at a time.
Do not fasten a seat belt around a
person and another object at the
same time. When using a seat belt to
secure infant or toddler restraints or
children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
74
Check your seat belt during travel to
make sure it is properly positioned.
Starting the engine
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be replaced. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive with at least
one window fully open.
Getting started
Driving
Automatic transmission
Starting with the SmartKey
Starting with KEYLESS-GO**
Make sure the gear selector lever is
set to P.
Warning!
Do not depress the accelerator.
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could
otherwise accidentally start the engine.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 3 and hold until
the engine starts ( page 62).
i
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
P
Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” ( page 197).
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle.
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts
automatically.
For more information, see “Turning off
the engine with the SmartKey”
( page 84).
G
You can start your vehicle without a
SmartKey using the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button on the gear selector lever.
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be located in the vehicle.
All the doors must be closed.
75
Getting started
Driving
Firmly depress the brake pedal during
If you are starting the engine with
the starting procedure.
KEYLESS-GO**, close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
i
If the SmartKey’s battery is discharged, you cannot start the vehicle
using the KEYLESS-GO function. Use
the SmartKey instead.
Make sure the gear selector lever is
set to P.
Do not depress the accelerator.
76
once.
or
The engine starts.
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
For more information, see “Turning off
the engine with KEYLESS-GO**”
( page 85).
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
If you are starting the engine with
the SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat
starting procedure.
radio signals from another source
may be interfering with the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO**.
Repeat the starting procedure
( page 74). Remember that extend-
ed starting attempts can drain the
battery.
Get a jump start ( page 476).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in
the fuel supply system.
Notify an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Getting started
Driving
Release the parking brake by pulling
Parking brake
on handle 1.
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Driving off
Firmly depress brake pedal.
!
In order to avoid damaging the transmission,
wait for the gear selection process
to complete before setting the vehicle in motion
place the gear selector lever in
position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
Move gear selector lever to
Warning!
Warning!
Release the brake pedal.
position D or R.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake,
which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.
Carefully depress the accelerator ped-
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
al.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs move
down.
!
If you hear a warning signal and the
message RELEASE PARKING BRAKE appears in the multifunction display
when driving off, you have forgotten
to release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
77
Getting started
Driving
!
!
Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds. Running a cold engine at
high engine speeds may shorten the
service life of the engine.
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake
reduces engine performance and
causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
Switching on headlamps
Low beam headlamps
The exterior lamp switch is located on
the dashboard to the left of the steering
wheel.
i
The vehicle automatically lock after
driving off. The locking knobs in the
doors move down.
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic
locking using the control system
( page 195).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This
could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS
will not prevent this type of loss of control.
For more information, see “Driving instructions” ( page 343).
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The green indicator lamp C in the
exterior lamp switch comes on.
78
Getting started
Driving
High beam
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements.
i
To signal minor directional changes,
e.g. passing or changing lanes, move
combination switch to point of resistance only and release. The turn signal flashes three times.
Combination switch
Combination switch
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
1 Turn signal, right
2 Turn signal, left
Push combination switch in direction
Press combination switch up 1 or
of arrow 1.
down 2.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on ( page 24).
The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp L or K flashes in the
instrument cluster ( page 24).
For more information, see “Lighting”
( page 155).
79
Getting started
Driving
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
!
Intermittent wiping
Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry. Dust that
accumulates on a windshield might
scratch the glass and/or damage the
windshield wipers blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. If it is
necessary to operate the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the windshield wipers
with windshield washer fluid
( page 81).
Switching on windshield wipers
Combination switch
Turn the combination switch to the
1 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
0
Windshield wipers off
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
I
Intermittent wiping
II
Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
80
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is
taken to an automatic car wash or
during windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the
windshield, and windshield wipers
may be damaged as a result.
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield.
Turn the combination switch to posi-
tion I.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by
the rain sensor.
Getting started
Driving
i
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
Intermittent wiping is interrupted
when the vehicle is at a standstill and
a front door is opened. This protects
persons getting into or out of the
vehicIe from being sprayed.
Press the combination switch in direc-
Intermittent wiping will be continued
when
all doors are closed
and
the gear selector lever is in
position D or R
or
the wiper setting is changed using
the combination switch
Single wipe
Press the combination switch briefly
in direction of arrow 1 to the resistance point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
tion of arrow 1 past the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
i
To prevent smears on the windshield,
wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining.
turn off the engine by pressing
the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button ( page 63) and open
the driver’s door (with the
driver’s door open, starter
switch is in position 0, same as
with SmartKey removed from
the starter switch)
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
Remove blockage.
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
!
If anything blocks the windshield
wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch
them off immediately.
If windshield wipers fail to function
at all in the combination switch position I:
Set the combination switch to the
next higher wiper speed.
Have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Maybach Studio.
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe location and
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
or
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system”
( page 363).
81
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
An ignition cable may be damaged.
The engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged
it.
Give very little gas.
Have the problem repaired by an au-
thorized Maybach Studio as soon as
possible.
The coolant temperature is above 248°F
(120°C)
In case of accident
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
Do not start the engine under any cir-
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to
cool.
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary ( page 361).
If problem persists, call
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
cumstances.
Notify local fire and/or police author-
ities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
Notify an authorized Maybach
Studio.
If no damage can be determined on the
major assemblies
fuel system
engine mount:
Start the engine in the usual manner.
82
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake or
steer the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Parking brake
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a
result of inadvertent vehicle movement,
before turning off the engine and leaving
the vehicle always:
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
( page 63).
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock
vehicle when leaving.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
Step firmly on parking brake
pedal 2.
When the engine is running, the
warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster will be illuminated.
83
Getting started
Parking and locking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake
and/or move the gear selector lever from
position P, either of which could result in
an accident and/or serious injury.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in
position P is dangerous. Also, when parked
on an incline, position P alone may not
prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly
hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P ( page 75).
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
84
Switching off headlamps
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
( page 78).
Turning off the engine with the
SmartKey
Turn the SmartKey in the starter
For more information, see “Lighting”
( page 155).
switch to position 0 and remove it.
Turning off the engine
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
i
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the curb.
The immobilizer is activated.
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
i
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds
if the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off the engine with
KEYLESS-GO**
Place the gear selector lever in P.
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 63) until the engine
shuts off.
With the driver’s door closed, the
starter switch is now in position 1.
With the driver‘s door open, the
starter switch is set to position 0,
same as SmartKey removed from the
starter switch. The immobilizer is activated.
!
If you hear a warning signal, you
have either
forgotten to switch off the vehicle’s exterior lamps, or
tried to turn off the engine while
the gear selector lever is not in P.
Turn off the lights or place the gear
selector lever in P.
Releasing seat belts
Press the seat belt release button
( page 73).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the
latch plate.
!
Make sure the seat belt retracts fully
so that the seat belt and/or latch
plate cannot get caught or pinched in
the door or in the seat mechanism.
This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt,
and/or cause damage to the door
and/or door trim panel. Such damage
is not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
85
Getting started
Parking and locking
Locking with the SmartKey
Locking
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the
door openings when closing the doors. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
Locking with KEYLESS-GO**
After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
( page 60).
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
( page 120).
1 Lock button
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
86
After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button 1 on the outside door handle
or on the trunk lid ( page 134).
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO**” ( page 124).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on
The restraint systems are:
Airbags
Seat belts
Emergency tensioning device
Child seats
Child seat recognition
Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH)
As independent systems, their protective
effects work in conjunction with each
other.
i
For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle
and restraint systems for infants and
children, see “Children in the vehicle”
( page 98).
88
for about 4 seconds when you turn
the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO**
start/stop button ( page 63) once. It
then goes out briefly, comes on again
and remains lit until you start the engine.
for about 4 seconds when you start
the engine by turning the SmartKey
or pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/
stop button.
i
The 1 indicator lamp comes on
and remains lit if the SmartKey is
turned to position 2 and left there or
the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
is pressed twice. The indicator lamp
will go out when you start the engine.
The restraint systems are fully operational if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit
when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
fails to go out after approximately
4 seconds
does not come on at all
comes on after the engine was started or while driving
For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
Maybach Studio immediately to have the
system checked.
For more information on SRS, see “Practical hints” ( page 413).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Maybach Studio immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the SRS may not
be activated when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
In addition, improper repair work on
the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended airbag
deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Airbags
Warning!
Warning!
G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal
impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side
impact airbags and head protection window curtain airbags) or rollovers (head
protection window curtain airbags). However, no system available today can totally
eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the airbags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the
airbags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a
fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get
out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. If you have any breathing difficulty but
cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening
a window or door.
G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in
a properly seated position and to wear
your seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure it
is properly positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and
hands on steering wheel position will help
to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of
position or too close to the airbag can be
seriously injured or killed by an airbag as it
inflates with great force in the blink of an
eye:
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the
seat backrest.
89
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s
breastbone to the center of the airbag
cover on the steering wheel must be at
least 10 in (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of
the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be
triggered. Always sit nearly upright,
properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a
Maybach authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates
with the BabySmartTM system installed
in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck
by the airbag when it inflates in a
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury will result.
Adjust the front passenger seat as far
as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
90
Warning!
G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in
the rear seat. Should you choose to place a
child 12 years old or under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle, you must properly use a BabySmartTM child restraint
which will turn off the passenger front airbag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn
off any side impact airbag.
It should be noted that with respect to
both front and rear side impact airbags
there is a possibility for a side airbag related injury if occupants, especially children,
are not properly seated or restrained when
next to a side airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do
its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury,
please follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where
the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should
the side airbag be activated.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and use an appropriately
sized infant or child restraint system
for all children 12 years old or under.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have both rear seat
mounted side airbags deactivated, then
deactivation can be accomplished upon
your written request to do so at an authorized Maybach Studio at an additional
cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Maybach Studio or call our Maybach
Assistance Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA), or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
i
Airbags are designed to activate only
in certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side impact and
head protection window curtain airbags) which exceed preset thresholds
and in certain rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). Only
during these events will they provide
their supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise
it is not possible for airbags to provide their supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and
impacts below airbag deployment
thresholds, airbags will not be activated. The driver and passenger will then
be protected to the extent possible by
a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed
to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.
We caution you not to rely on the
presence of the airbags in order to
avoid wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important for your safety and the safety of
your passengers that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to make sure the
vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
91
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and airbag
Warning!
92
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Airbags and emergency tensioning
devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD that was activated must be
replaced.
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, seat covers, badges etc. over
the steering wheel hub, passenger
front airbag cover, outboard sides of
the seat backrests, door trim panels, or
door frame trims, and installation of
additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and
wiring.
Keep area between airbags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages,
purses, umbrellas, etc.).
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
Do not make any modification that
could change the effectiveness of the
belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles
over the door. These items may turn
into projectiles and cause head and
other injuries when curtain airbag is
deployed.
Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat.
Always keep both feet on the floor in
front of the seat.
Airbag system components will be hot
after an airbag has inflated. Do not
touch.
In addition, improper repair work on
the SRS creates a risk of rendering
the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on
the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Maybach Studio.
Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious
injuries resulting from airbag deployment.
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an
SRS by alerting them to the applicable
section in the Operator’s Manual.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the side impact airbags. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for availability.
Front airbags
Driver’s and front passenger airbags are
deployed:
in the event of certain frontal impacts
if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger front airbag will only be
deployed if:
the front passenger seat is occupied
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console is not
lit ( page 101)
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
1 Driver’s airbag
2 Passenger airbag
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
93
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Side impact airbags
Window curtain airbags
The side impact airbags are deployed:
The side window curtain airbags are deployed:
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
on the impacted side of the vehicle
independently of the front airbags
The side impact airbags are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
on the impacted side of the vehicle
independently of the front airbags
in certain vehicle rollovers
Always wear your seat belt. All vehicle
occupants always need to have their seat
belts fastened and wear them properly.
The front passenger side impact airbag
will only deploy if the system senses that
the front passenger seat is occupied.
In addition, applicable motor vehicle
safety laws require you to wear seat
belts. Even where this is not the case, we
strongly recommend that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened
and wear them properly.
1 Front window curtain airbag
2 Rear window curtain airbag
The window curtain airbags fill up the
area indicated by the arrows.
1 Front side impact airbags
2 Rear side impact airbags
94
Seat belts
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates to remind you
and your passengers to fasten your seat
belts. If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened before the engine is started, the
seat belt telltale < illuminates and a
warning chime sounds for approximately
6 seconds when the engine is started.
For more information on fastening seat
belts, see “Getting started” ( page 72).
i
For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle
and restraint systems for infants and
children, see “Children in the vehicle”
( page 98).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Due to the considerably larger interior
compared to other vehicles, for occupants
in the rear of the vehicle not properly
wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury
in an accident is significantly increased.
They are much more likely to be thrown
around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking
maneuvers.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are properly
wearing your seat belt. Airbags can only
protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the
seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If
you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
seat backrest and seat belt provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly
positioned on the body.
that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in
all seat settings in the event of a collision
or similar situation.
Keep the door storage compartments
closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to
catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt.
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear
cabin) can be used in a reclined position
with seat belts properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in
the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a belt
system and kinematic electronic controls
95
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must
also be checked.
Warning!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
96
Never wear the shoulder belt under
your arm, against your neck or off your
shoulder. In a crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing,
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as
these might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across
your abdomen, it could cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Never use a seat belt for more than
one person at a time. Do not fasten a
seat belt around a person and another
person or other objects.
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces.
The twisted belt against your body
could cause injuries.
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts
help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents,
including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver’s airbag, passenger front airbag, side
impact airbags, head protection window curtain airbags for side windows),
ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning
device), and front seat knee bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front airbags and ETD) and side (side impact,
window curtain airbags and ETD) impacts which exceed preset deployment
thresholds and in certain rollovers
(window curtain airbags).
Only use seat belts which have been approved for Maybach vehicles.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to failure of the seat
belts.
G
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Pregnant women should also use a lapshoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat.
Always keep both feet on the floor in
front of the seat.
Emergency tensioning device (ETD), seat
belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are equipped with emergency
tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such
a way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts
on occupants during a crash.
i
The ETDs for the front seats will only
activate if the respective front seat
belt is fastened (latch plate properly
inserted into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will
activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened.
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the passenger side
and, with the seat belt fastened to secure the object, the ETD to deploy in
a crash which exceeds the system’s
deployment threshold.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for
front seats reduces the retracting force
of the seat belts when they are in normal
use.
G
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases when:
Warning!
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level
An emergency tensioning device (ETD)
that was activated must be replaced.
in certain vehicle rollovers
if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see
1 indicator lamp ( page 88).
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your authorized Maybach Studio.
97
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you
in the vehicle:
Secure the child using an infant or
child restraint appropriate to the age
and size of the child.
Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become
very hot, and the child could be burned on
these parts.
If children open a door, they could
injure other persons
get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless
they are firmly secured in place. For more
information, see “Loading” ( page 280)
and “Useful features” ( page 281).
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
strong braking maneuvers
sudden changes of direction
an accident
Infant and child restraint systems
Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
We recommend all infants and children
be properly restrained at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
98
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely
and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to
indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked.
Push down on child restraint to take up
any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle
and let seat belt retract completely. The
seat belt can again be used in the usual
manner.
Warning!
G
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the
District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or
child restraint system properly secured by a lap-shoulder belt or, if so
equipped, a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint
manufacturer of compliance with this
standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the
instruction manual provided with the
restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully
read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to
infant or child restraints.
Never release the seat belt buckle while
the vehicle is in motion, since the special
seat belt retractor will be deactivated.
i
For more information on child seats
with mounting fittings for tether anchorages ( page 102).
For information on LATCH-type child
seat mounts ( page 103).
99
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a
Maybach authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the
BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag
when it inflates in a crash. If this happens,
serious or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated
in an appropriate infant or child restraint
system, which is properly secured with the
vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or
secured via lower anchors and top tether
strap, fully in accordance with the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
100
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children over 41 lbs
until they reach a height where a lap/
shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; even if the children are secured in
a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious
personal injury.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is located on the upper part of the
front center console.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 1 located on the upper part of the
front center console will be illuminated,
except with the SmartKey removed or in
starter switch position 0.
i
The system does not deactivate the
side impact airbag, the window curtain airbag and the emergency tensioning device.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
1 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp
Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seats, designed for use with the Maybach
system and available at any authorized
Maybach Studio are required for use
with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special child seat
properly installed, the passenger front
airbag will not deploy.
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or the
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
( page 63) is pressed once or twice,
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 1 located on the upper part of the
front center console comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then goes
out.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning.
You must see an authorized Maybach
Studio before seating any child on the
front passenger seat.
For more information on PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp, see “Practical hints” ( page 416).
Warning!
G
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child
seat designed to operate with it. It will not
work with child seats which are not
BabySmartTM compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation
system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of
an accident, instead of protecting the
child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
101
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy only
if the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains illuminated.
Make sure to check the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp every time you
use the special system child seat. Should
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp go out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. If the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains out,
do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
transport children on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
Warning!
G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones, electronic tags such as those used
in ski passes and like electronic devices on
the front passenger seat. Signals from such
devices may interfere with the
BabySmartTM system. Such signal interference, for example, may cause the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp not to
come on or be continuously lit during selftest, indicating that the system is not functioning.
Installing infant and child restraint systems
This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
1 Cover of top anchorage ring
Open cover 1 to access anchorage
ring.
Guide tether strap between head re-
straints and top of seat back.
102
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Head restraint must be positioned such
that the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and top of
seat back.
Make sure the tether strap is not
twisted.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Close cover after removing the tether
strap.
Warning!
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
of the tether strap, to anchorage
ring 3.
G
Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the
rear seat position after installing the child
restraint could damage the child restraint
and/or introduce undesirable slack into the
webbing and loosen or misposition the
child restraint, lessening the effectiveness
of the child restraint and thus increasing
the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) type anchors (at each of the
outer rear seats) for the installation of a
LATCH child seat with the matching anchor fittings.
Warning!
G
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children over
41 lbs until they reach a height where a
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
Install child seat according to manufactur
er’s instructions.
i
For safety, please make sure the hook
has attached to the ring beyond the
safety catch, as illustrated.
103
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
To enable the child seat to perform its protective function,
the rear seat backrest must be fully upright ( page 141)
the seat cushion must be tilted fully
downwards ( page 141).
The child seat must be firmly attached in
the right and left side anchors 2.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may
come loose during an accident which could
result in serious injury or death to your
child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats
or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in
a child restraint system.
Warning!
G
Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the
rear seat position after installing the child
restraint could damage the child restraint
and/or introduce undesirable slack into the
webbing and loosen or misposition the
104
child restraint, lessening the effectiveness
of the child restraint and thus increasing
the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
The LATCH-type anchors are located between the seat cushion and the backrest.
i
Vehicles with a rear center seat*:
Make sure the seat belt for the center
seat can operate freely with a child
seat installed.
i
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using
the vehicle’s seat belt system. Install
child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
1 Indicates the position of the anchors
2 Anchor
Bring the rear seat backrest to a fully
upright position ( page 141).
Adjust the seat cushion tilt fully
downwards ( page 141).
Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Override switch for rear passenger
compartment
You can disable select functions in the
rear passenger compartment for added
safety (for instance when you have children riding in the rear passenger compartment).
The override switch is located in the driver’s door.
rear door windows operation
( page 233)
cigarette lighter in the rear
( page 300)
adjusting the front passenger seat
position from the rear ( page 147)
12-V socket in the rear center console
( page 305)
closing the partition* from the rear
( page 312)
Press switch 1.
The functions in the rear are enabled
again.
Warning!
You can disable the following functions
in the rear passenger compartment:
Deactivating override switch
G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the
window opening.
1 Deactivating override switch
2 Activating override switch
Activating override switch
Press switch 2.
The functions in the rear are disabled.
i
The rear door windows can still be operated with the switches located in
the driver’s door.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
For information, see “Power windows”
( page 233).
105
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
21/2 minutes.
Any unauthorized modification to
this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
1 Â Panic button
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
106
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to
this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Activating
Press and hold button 1 for at least
1 second.
Deactivating
Press button 1 again.
or
Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch.
or
Press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button ( page 63).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information
on the following driving safety systems:
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Electro-hydraulic brake system
Warning!
G
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
Excessive speed, especially in turns
Wet and slippery road surfaces
Following another vehicle too closely
The ABS, BAS, ESP® and electro-hydraulic
brake system cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, BAS, ESP® and
electro-hydraulic brake system is only
achieved with winter tires (M + S
tires), or snow chains as required.
ABS
Warning!
G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead.
Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces
braking effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the
wheels do not lock during braking. This
allows you to maintain the ability to
steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.
107
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Braking
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of
the electro-hydraulic brake system, you
will not feel any pulsation in the brake
pedal.
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
Warning!
G
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS
and the ESP® are also switched off.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the
wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability and extending
the braking distance.
brake pedal.
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by
the ABS, namely braking power and the
ability to steer the vehicle.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashes
whenever the ABS is activated which can
be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to
take extra care while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
108
For more information on ABS, see “Practical hints” ( page 410).
BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance.
Apply continuous full braking pres-
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, following another
vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
sure until the emergency braking situation is over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal.
The BAS is then deactivated.
Warning!
G
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available
that BAS would normally provide in an
emergency braking maneuver. Therefore,
the braking distance may increase.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESP®
Warning!
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying brakes to the appropriate
wheel and by limiting engine output, the
ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The
ESP® is especially useful while driving off
and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The
ESP® also stabilizes the vehicle during
braking maneuvers.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP®
is engaged.
G
Never switch off the ESP® when you see
the ABS/ ESP® warning lamp v flashing
in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows:
While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when
the engine is running.
109
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded. The
ESP® cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP®
equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
i
ESP®
The
will only function properly
if you use wheels of the recommended tire size ( page 491).
Switching off the ESP®
!
Because of the ESP’s® automatic operation, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when
the parking brake is being tested
on a brake test dynamometer
the vehicle is being towed with
the front/rear axle raised.
Active braking action through
the ESP® may otherwise seriously
damage the brake system.
For more information on ESP®, see “Practical hints” ( page 410) and
( page 421).
Warning!
G
The ESP® should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of
the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn
off the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have the
drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as:
when driving with snow chains
in deep snow
in sand or gravel
!
Turn on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do
not apply anymore.
110
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
When you switch off the ESP®
ESP®
the
cle
the engine output is not limited,
which allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip
the traction control will still brake a
spinning wheel
the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for
an extended period with the ESP®
switched off. This may cause serious
damage to the drivetrain which is not
covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
does not stabilize the vehi-
i
When the ESP® is switched off and
one or more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP® warning
lamp v in the speedometer flashes. However, the ESP® will then not
stabilize the vehicle.
The switch is located on the lower part of
the front center console.
Switching on the ESP®
Press switch 1 again.
1 ESP® switch (on/off)
®
Press switch 1 until the ABS/ESP
warning lamp v in the speedometer comes on.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in
the speedometer goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP® switched on.
The ESP® is deactivated.
Warning!
G
When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®.
111
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Electro-hydraulic brake system
The electro-hydraulic brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo
assistance. You have increased braking
safety and improved braking comfort.
Warning!
G
Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated in the instrument cluster, for example
by the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada
only) red brake warning lamp. Refer to the
“Practical hints” section ( page 414). Also
read and observe the messages in the instrument cluster display ( page 417).
Warning!
G
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake
system operation and switch it into its
emergency operation mode. In such a case,
the red brake warning lamp ( page 414)
and warning messages in the instrument
cluster come on while driving
(see page 429 to page 430). To brake, the
driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the
pedal much further to obtain the expected
braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only
be applied to the front wheels. Stopping
distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that
the vehicle be transported with all wheels
off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar
must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing
methods and the vehicle requires towing
with all four wheels on the ground.
112
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not
to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle”
( page 478).
The electro-hydraulic brake system is automatically activated when you:
unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or the KEYLESS-GO**
open the driver’s or passenger door
turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1
in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**, press
the start/stop button ( page 63) on
gear selector lever once
depress the brake pedal
release the parking brake
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
i
If the electro-hydraulic brake system
is activated when the brake pedal is
first depressed, you may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer
pedal travel than normal. When releasing the pedal, you may also feel
the brake pedal pulsate and you may
hear a sound which is caused by the
activation of the electro-hydraulic
brake system pump. This is normal
and not an indication of a malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal
when you release the brake pedal
and the sound soon ceases.
If you experience a reduced pedal resistance and longer pedal travel while
driving and the red brake warning
lamp ( page 414) illuminates and/or
warning messages appear in the instrument cluster (see page 429 to
page 430), the brake system is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions
of the warning message(s) and have
the brake system checked immediately.
Warning!
G
Have brake pad replacement and other
work on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians
only. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. The electrohydraulic brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High
pressure is intermittently built up in the
system as part of its automatic self-test. In
addition, the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when the driver’s or
passenger door is opened, when the starter switch is in position 1, when the brake
pedal is depressed or when the parking
brake is released. Failure to deactivate the
system prior to maintenance will cause
brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to
leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns). Extended brake pistons may also cause injury.
The electro-hydraulic brake servo assistance switches off automatically:
approximately 20 seconds after you
locked the vehicle from outside
approximately 2 minutes after you
turned the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or removed
the SmartKey
pressed the KEYLESS-GO** start/
stop button ( page 63) to turn
off the engine or power supply
and opened the driver’s door
(with driver’s door open, the starter switch is set to position 0, same
as SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
113
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Note on driving with the electro-hydraulic brake system
Following extended periods of only
minor loads to your brake system,
you should occasionally apply the
brakes when traveling at high speeds.
This improves the grip of the brake
pads.
Warning!
G
After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle.
This produces heat which serves to
dry the brake disks and help prevent
corrosion.
On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2 or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
and to reduce brake wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes
faster.
Only components approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles (e.g. brake
pads) should be installed on your vehicle. Brake pads not approved by us
for use on Maybach vehicles may impair the safety of your vehicle.
Be very careful not to endanger other road
users when you apply the brakes.
114
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
i
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Maybach Studio or call
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
Activating
With the SmartKey
Remove the SmartKey from the start-
er switch.
With KEYLESS-GO**
Turn off the engine by means of the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
( page 63).
Open the driver’s door.
Deactivating
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed,
a visual and audible alarm is triggered
when someone opens
a door
the trunk
the hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key
someone opens a door from the inside
someone opens the trunk with the
emergency release button
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by
the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
115
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system
i
Canceling the alarm
The indicator lamp located below the
hazard warning flasher switch in on the
upper part of the front center console.
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:
To cancel the alarm:
a door
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
the trunk
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
With the SmartKey
switch.
or
Press button Œ or ‹.
The alarm is canceled.
Disarming the alarm system
Unlock your vehicle.
1 Indicator lamp
Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO**.
The turn signal lamps flash three
times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator
lamp 1 flashes to indicate that the
alarm system is armed.
116
With KEYLESS-GO**
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed.
Grasp an outside door handle.
i
or
The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately
40 seconds if no door was opened.
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 63).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is canceled.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered
when someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by
the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
Disarming the tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away
alarm feature, switch off the tow-away
alarm before towing the vehicle, or
when parking on a surface subject to
movement, such as a ferry or auto train.
The button is located on the overhead
control panel.
Switch off the ignition and remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away
alarm if the ignition is switched on.
Press button 1.
The indicator lamp in the button
comes on briefly.
Exit the vehicle and lock it with the
SmartKey or (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO**) with the lock button
at each outside door handle or trunk
lid.
Arming the tow-away alarm
i
Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms automatically.
or KEYLESS-GO**.
The tow-away alarm is automatically
armed after about 30 seconds.
1 Tow-away alarm off button
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle
again.
117
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
With the SmartKey
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
Press button Œ or ‹.
The alarm is canceled.
With KEYLESS-GO**
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
or
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 63).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is canceled.
118
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Electrotransparent roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
119
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section, you
will find detailed information on how to
operate the equipment installed on your
vehicle. If you are already familiar with
the basic functions of your vehicle, this
section will be of particular interest to
you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the
basic functions of the vehicle, refer to
the “Getting started” section of this
manual. The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each
segment.
For more information on locking and unlocking, see “Getting started”
( page 60) and ( page 83).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control
and a removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the
vehicle when you are in close proximity
to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
120
the doors
the trunk
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote control
1
2
3
4
5
6
 Panic button ( page 106)
‹ Lock button
Š Opening button for trunk
Mechanical key locking tab
ΠUnlock button
Battery check lamp
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is
possible for children to open a locked door
from the inside, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
!
To prevent possible malfunction,
avoid exposing the SmartKey to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
i
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to
this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Any unauthorized modification to
this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
i
When you unlock the vehicle, the
electro-hydraulic brake system is activated ( page 112).
i
You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” ( page 235)
and “Convenience closing feature”
( page 236).
121
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Global unlocking
Press button Œ.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking if:
neither a door nor the trunk is
opened
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
the central locking switch is not activated
Global locking
Press button ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
122
Selective setting
Global unlocking
If you frequently travel alone, you may
wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
Press button Πtwice.
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds
until battery check lamp 6
( page 120) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as
follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Global locking
Press button ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Press button Πonce.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s door
moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Restoring to factory setting
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds
until battery check lamp 6 flashes
twice.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!
Checking the batteries
Unlocking and opening the trunk
If you can no longer lock or unlock
the vehicle with the SmartKey, then
either the batteries in the SmartKey
are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries
are drained.
Press button Œ or ‹.
You can unlock and open the trunk separately.
Check the batteries in the
SmartKey and replace them if necessary ( page 457).
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the driver’s door ( page 452) and
the trunk ( page 453).
Use the mechanical key to lock the
driver’s door ( page 452) and the
trunk ( page 137).
Have the vehicle batteries and
their connections checked
( page 471).
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning,
contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Battery check lamp 6 ( page 120)
comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey batteries are in order.
i
If battery check lamp 6 does not
come on briefly during check, then
the SmartKey batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries ( page 457).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Maybach Studio.
i
If the batteries are checked within
signal range of the vehicle, pressing
button Œ or ‹ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft
(1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
Press and hold button Š until the
trunk unlocks and begins to open.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š. The trunk lid stops moving.
i
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately ( page 137).
123
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Maybach Studio.
Report the loss of the SmartKey or
the mechanical key immediately to
your car insurance company.
If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Maybach Studio will be
glad to supply you with a replacement.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO
come with two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO, each with remote control
and a removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit.
The function of the SmartKey overrules
the KEYLESS-GO function.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is checked every time you
grasp an outside door handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, your vehicle unlocks
124
the doors
the trunk
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
1
2
3
4
5
6
 Panic button ( page 106)
‹ Lock button
Š Opening button for trunk
Mechanical key locking tab
ΠUnlock button
Battery check lamp
i
When any outside door handle other
than the driver’s outside door handle
is grasped, the vehicle is centrally unlocked.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/
or serious personal injury.
!
To prevent possible malfunction,
avoid exposing the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to
this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to
this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
i
When you unlock the vehicle, the
electro-hydraulic brake system is activated ( page 112).
i
You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**, see “Summer opening feature” ( page 235) and “Convenience closing feature”
( page 236).
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
125
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
( page 120).
You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with button ‹).
Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
electronic items such as a mobile
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
trunk lid.
126
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
All the doors must be closed.
The brake pedal must be firmly
depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO. The vehicle then cannot
be locked or the engine started via
the KEYLESS-GO system.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
removed from the vehicle while the
ignition is switched on (e.g. if passenger exits the vehicle with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO), the
message KEY NOT RECOGNIZED will appear in the multifunction display
while driving off.
If you have started the engine with
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
( page 63), you can only turn it off
again with this button, even if you
have put the SmartKey in the starter
switch in the meantime.
This does not apply if, after starting,
the gear selector lever is still in position P and the SmartKey is then inserted in the starter switch. The
SmartKey will then have priority over
the KEYLESS-GO function and the vehicle’s electrical system will operate
according to the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch, even
stopping the engine.
Find the SmartKey or change its
present location immediately
(e.g. place it on the front passenger
seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside
the vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle, the message KEY STILL IN VEHICLE will
appear in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Global unlocking
Grasp an outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
i
If the vehicle has been parked for
more than 72 hours, you must pull an
outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking if:
neither a door nor the trunk is
opened
the central locking switch is not activated
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
i
The vehicle could be inadvertently
unlocked if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the
vehicle and
an outside door handle is splashed
with water, or
you attempt to clean an outside
door handle.
Global locking
Press the lock button on an outside
door handle ( page 86) or trunk lid
( page 129).
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may
wish to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driver’s outside door handle only the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap unlocks.
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 6
( page 124) flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
Grasp the driver’s outside door han-
dle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s moves up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Global unlocking
Grasp any outside door handle other
than the driver’s outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
127
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking
!
Checking the batteries
Press the lock button on an outside
door handle ( page 86).
If you can no longer lock or unlock
the vehicle with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, then either the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
are discharged, the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the
vehicle batteries are drained.
Press button Œ or ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
i
You can also lock the vehicle using
the lock button on the trunk lid
( page 129) or KEYLESS-GO locking/
closing switch ( page 135).
Restoring to factory setting
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds
until battery check lamp 6
( page 124) flashes twice.
i
Check the batteries in the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO and
replace them if necessary
( page 457).
If battery check lamp 6 does not
come on briefly during check, then
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the driver’s door ( page 452) and
the trunk ( page 453).
Replace the batteries ( page 457).
Use the mechanical key to lock the
driver’s door ( page 452) and the
trunk ( page 137).
Have the vehicle batteries and
their connections checked
( page 471).
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
malfunctioning, contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
128
Battery check lamp 6 ( page 124)
comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries
are in order.
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Maybach Studio.
i
If the batteries are checked within
signal range of the vehicle, pressing
button Œ or ‹ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking using the lock button on
the trunk lid
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent
lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is recognized inside the vehicle or in
the trunk.
i
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
You can also lock the vehicle using
the lock button on an outside door
handle ( page 86) or KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch ( page 135).
If you lose your SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you
should do the following:
Unlocking and opening the trunk
You can unlock and open the trunk separately.
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft
(1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
Press and hold button Š until the
trunk unlocks and begins to open.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
1 Lock button
Press lock button 1 on the trunk lid.
All turn signal lamps flash three
times. The locking knobs in the doors
move down. The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
deactivated by an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Report the loss of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key
immediately to your car insurance
company.
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Your authorized Maybach Studio will be
glad to supply you with a replacement.
To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š. The trunk lid stops moving.
i
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately ( page 137).
129
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
i
Front doors
If the vehicle has previously been
locked using the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO**, opening a door from
the inside will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system.
Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
Rear doors
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the
vehicle.
Press the KEYLESS-GO**
start/stop button ( page 63).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be inside the vehicle.
tive front door to open door.
If door was locked, locking knob 1
will move up.
Pull up locking knob 1 on the re-
spective rear door to unlock door.
Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
tive rear door to open door.
Closing the rear doors automatically
from the inside (Maybach 62)
You can close the rear doors automatically.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the
door opening when closing the door. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.
In case of danger, release the remote rear
door closing switch to stop the closing procedure.
130
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
The remote rear door closing switch is
above the rear door.
i
You can also close the rear doors by
hand.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO**: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
Pull on handle 1.
The trunk opens.
Opening the trunk
Opening the trunk from the outside
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft
(1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The handle is located above the rear license plate recess.
1 Remote rear door closing switch
If necessary, pull the door into its lock
by hand.
i
Release switch 1 to interrupt proce-
dure.
Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open
while the vehicle is in motion, putting you
and/or others at risk.
To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**.
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately ( page 137).
pletely closed.
G
The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
i
Pull switch 1 until the door is com-
Warning!
!
1 Handle
The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, or
from its inside in an emergency, see
“Trunk lid emergency release”
( page 136).
131
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk from the inside
!
You can open the trunk from the inside
if the vehicle is stationary.
The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft
(1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The remote trunk opening/closing switch
is located on the dashboard to the left of
the steering wheel.
To stop the opening procedure, press
or pull trunk opening/closing
switch 1.
begins to open.
The trunk opens. You will see the
message TRUNK OPEN in the multifunction display until you close the trunk.
132
Press the remote trunk opening/closing switch ( page 132) until the mes-
sage TRUNK OPEN disappears from the
multifunction display and the trunk is
closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately ( page 137).
Release the remote trunk opening/
The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, or
from its inside in an emergency, see
“Trunk emergency release”
( page 136).
Pull switch 1 until the trunk lid
Closing the trunk from the inside
i
i
1 Remote trunk opening/closing switch
Closing the trunk
closing switch.
i
You can also close the trunk by hand.
Warning!
G
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating the remote trunk opening/closing
switch. Monitor the closing procedure
carefully to make sure no one is in danger
of being injured. To interrupt the closing
procedure, release the remote trunk opening/closing switch.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the remote trunk opening/closing switch
can be operated. Therefore, do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO**)
You can close the trunk separately.
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with
an object while closing (e.g. luggage that
has been piled too high) in the upper
motion sequence, the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens
slightly.
1 Trunk closing switch
Press switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.
i
You can also close the trunk by hand.
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
press the trunk closing switch 1
press button Š on the SmartKey
press or pull the remote trunk opening/closing switch (on the dashboard
to the left of the steering wheel).
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the trunk closing switch can
be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with
an object while closing (e.g. luggage that
has been piled too high) in the upper
motion sequence, the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens
slightly.
133
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**)
You can close the trunk separately.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with
an object while closing (e.g. luggage that
has been piled too high) in the upper
motion sequence, the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens
slightly.
i
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent
lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is recognized inside the vehicle or in
the trunk.
Do not place the SmartKey in the
open trunk. You may lock yourself
out.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it. All turn signal
lamps flash three times to confirm
locking.
1 Trunk closing switch
with KEYLESS-GO with you.
Press switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.
i
You can also close the trunk by hand.
134
Warning!
G
Make sure you have the SmartKey
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
press the trunk closing switch 1
press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
press button Š on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO
press or pull the remote trunk opening/closing switch (on the dashboard
to the left of the steering wheel).
Closing the trunk and locking the vehicle
from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO**)
You can close the trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously.
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the trunk closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it. All turn signal
lamps flash three times to confirm
locking.
The vehicle is locked and the trunk
closes automatically.
With all doors closed, all turn signal
lamps flash three times to confirm
locking. The locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft
alarm system is activated.
i
You can also close the trunk by hand.
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Press switch 1 briefly.
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
Make sure you have the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO with you.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with
an object while closing (e.g. luggage that
has been piled too high) in the upper
motion sequence, the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens
slightly.
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent
lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is recognized inside the vehicle or in
the trunk.
135
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch 1
press the trunk closing switch
press button Š on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO
press or pull the remote trunk opening/closing switch (on the dashboard
to the left of the steering wheel).
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch can be
operated. Therefore, do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use
of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
136
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Trunk emergency release
With the emergency release button, the
trunk can be opened from inside the
trunk.
The emergency release button is located
on the inside of the trunk lid.
Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
The trunk unlocks and opens slightly.
Push up the trunk lid to fully open.
i
The emergency release button unlocks the trunk while the vehicle is
standing still or in motion.
Illumination of the emergency release
button:
The button flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.
The button flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk.
i
The emergency release button does
not unlock the trunk if the vehicle
battery is discharged or disconnected.
1 Emergency release button
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i
Valet trunk
If the vehicle has previously been
locked using the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO**, opening the trunk
from the inside using the emergency
release button will trigger the antitheft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
i
To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk, e.g. when you valet
park the vehicle, lock it separately
with the mechanical key. Leave only
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** less its mechanical key
with the vehicle.
The lock is located next to the handle
above the rear license plate recess.
Grasp an outside door handle.
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 and remove the mechanical key in that position to lock the
trunk.
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
i
clockwise to neutral position 1 and
remove the mechanical key in that
position to unlock the trunk.
Press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button ( page 63).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be inside the vehicle.
lid lock.
Turn the mechanical key counter-
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the
vehicle.
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
You can only cancel the separate
trunk locking mode by means of the
mechanical key.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey ( page 452).
You can now open the trunk
( page 131).
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
Close the trunk ( page 132).
137
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Power closing assist for doors and
trunk lid
It is not necessary to slam the door or
trunk lid closed. A pneumatic power assist mechanism draws doors and trunk lid
closed quietly and automatically once
the door or trunk lid has been latched.
When the pneumatic power-assisted
mechanism has stopped, doors and/or
trunk can be re-opened.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the
door or trunk opening when closing a door
or the trunk. Be especially careful when
small children are around.
In case of danger, pull the respective inside
or outside door handle, or pull on trunk lid
handle.
To prevent personal injury, never activate
the closing assist mechanism by tampering
with the door or trunk lid latch.
138
Power closing assist for doors
Press the doors gently past the initial
engage position into the lock.
The doors close automatically.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open
while the vehicle is in motion, putting you
and/or others at risk.
Power closing assist for trunk lid
Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.
The trunk closes automatically.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically
lock when the ignition is switched on
and the wheels are turning at speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
i
The doors unlock automatically after
an accident if the force of the impact
exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds
of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle
is pushed or towed
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system
( page 195).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle
before starting to drive.
Your vehicle is equipped with locking
and unlocking switches for the driver
and rear seat passengers.
The rear seat passengers’ switches are located on the rear center console between the rear seats.
The driver’s switches are located on the
upper part of the front center console.
The fuel filler flap will not be locked or
unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Rear seat passengers’ switches (example illustration from Maybach 57)
Driver’s switches
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
139
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking
Press central locking switch 1.
If all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
i
Rear seat passenger switches (Maybach 57
with rear center seat*)
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
Rear seat passenger switches (Maybach 62
with rear center seat*)
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
140
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO**, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch 1:
While in the global remote control mode, the vehicle is unlocked
when a door is opened from the
inside.
While in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened
from inside is unlocked.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
In addition to adjusting the head re-
For more information on seat adjustment, see “Adjusting” ( page 65).
straint tilt using the corresponding
power control on the rear door control panel, the angle of the head restraint can also be adjusted manually.
Push or pull on the lower edge of the
head restraint cushion.
Rear seats
Head restraint tilt
For information on front seat head restraint adjustment, see “Adjusting”
( page 67).
i
Maybach 62
1 Head restraints
2 Head restraint side cushions
Adjust the side cushions of the head
restraints by hand.
Maybach 57
1 Head restraints
2 Head restraint side cushions
Adjust the head restraint in such a
way that it is as close to the head as
possible.
Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 57)
i
To adjust settings for the right rear
passenger seat, make sure the right
rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected ( page 147).
i
The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted.
141
Controls in detail
Seats
Warning!
G
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle.
The seats can also be operated with the respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.
1
2
3
4
5
Head restraint height
Head restraint tilt
Seat backrest tilt
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat cushion tilt
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
or
Open the respective door.
Head restraint height
Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 1.
Head restraint tilt
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 2.
142
G
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Seat backrest tilt
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 3 until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
Controls in detail
Seats
i
Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for
easier removal and installation of the
head restraints.
i
The functions for adjusting backrest
tilt and seat fore and aft are linked
functions. When the seat is adjusted
fore and aft, the backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and vice versa.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 4.
!
When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise you
could damage the seats.
Seat cushion tilt
Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 5 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 62)
i
To adjust settings for the right rear
passenger seat, make sure the right
rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected ( page 147).
i
The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle.
The seats can also be operated with the respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a
Fully reclined position
Upright position
Head restraint height
Head restraint tilt
Seat backrest tilt
Seat cushion depth
Seat cushion tilt
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Leg rest length
Leg rest tilt
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
or
Open the respective door.
143
Controls in detail
Seats
Fully reclined/upright position
Head restraint tilt
Seat backrest tilt
To adjust seat to fully reclined posi-
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 4 ( page 143).
Press switch forward or backward in
tion, press switch 1.
Press and hold switch 1 until seat is
in desired position.
To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 1.
To adjust seat to upright position,
press switch 2.
Press and hold switch 2 until seat is
in desired position.
To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 2.
Head restraint height
Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 3.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
direction of arrow 5 until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
i
The functions for adjusting backrest
tilt and seat fore and aft are linked
functions. When the seat is adjusted
fore and aft, the backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and vice versa.
Seat cushion depth
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 6 until your legs
are supported comfortably.
Seat cushion tilt
Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 7 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
144
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 8 ( page 143).
!
When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise you
could damage the seats.
Leg rest length
Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 9 ( page 143) to adjust
the leg rest length.
Extending and retracting the rear seat
head restraints
Warning!
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
i
You can only retract the rear seat
head restraints when no rear seat
passenger is wearing a seat belt.
G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear seat head restraints in the extended
position when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct
the retracting/extending operation of the
head restraints.
The switch is located on the lower part of
the front center console.
Retracting rear seat head restraints
Press switch 1.
The rear seat head restraints retract.
Extending rear seat head restraints
Press switch 1 again.
The rear outer seat head restraints
extend to your last set position.
Leg rest tilt
or
Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow a ( page 143) to adjust
Adjust the head restraints with the
the leg rest tilt.
seat adjustment switches in the rear
passenger compartment.
i
When you fasten your seat belt in the
rear, the respective rear outer seat
head restraint extends to your last set
position.
1 Switch for rear seat head restraints
145
Controls in detail
Seats
i
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
The rear center seat* head restraint
cannot be extended using the switch
in the front center console. Use the
switch on the lower right side of the
rear center seat.
or
Rear center seat* head restraint adjustment
The switch is on the lower right side of
the rear center seat.
Warning!
Open a rear door.
Press switch 1 and hold it.
The rear seat head restraint extends
until you release the switch.
Press switch 2 and hold it.
The rear seat head restraint retracts
until you release the switch.
G
For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Extending
2 Retracting
146
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the rear center seat head restraint can be
operated when a rear door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle.
Controls in detail
Seats
Setting front passenger seat position
from rear
This function lets you adjust the position
of the front passenger seat from the
right rear passenger seat.
The switch is located on the right rear
passenger door.
Warning!
G
When adjusting the passenger seat, make
sure the seat, if occupied, is as far from the
passenger front airbag as possible.
Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an
accident or braking maneuver.
Make sure no one can be caught or injured
while the seat is being adjusted.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1
2
3
4
5
6
Front passenger seat adjustment
Right rear passenger seat adjustment
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat cushion tilt
Seat backrest tilt
Head restraint height
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the power seats can be operated when the
respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
or
Open the right rear passenger door.
Press switch 1.
Adjust passenger seat to desired posi-
tion using switches 3 through 6.
To adjust right rear passenger seat,
press button 2.
i
If you simultaneously operate an adjustment switch in the rear and on the
front passenger side, no adjustment
will take place.
i
Maybach 62:
If the rear seat is in reclined position,
the adjustment of the front passenger’s
!
seat backrest and
Do not move the front passenger seat
completely forward if objects are
stored in the front passenger-side
footwell.
longitudinal position
toward the rear is restricted.
147
Controls in detail
Seats
i
Adjusting the front passenger seat
position from the rear is not possible
if you activate the override switch
( page 105).
The switches for the front seats are located on the inner side of the seat.
The switches for the rear seats on
Maybach 57 are located on the inner side
of the seat.
Multicontour seats
The multicontour seat has a movable
seat cushion and inflatable air cushions
built into the seat backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be
continuously varied with regulators on
the right side of the seat after switching
on ignition.
i
Vehicles with rear center seat*:
The rear center seat is not a multicontour seat.
148
Driver’s seat/front passenger seat
1
2
3
4
Lumbar region support
Shoulder region support
Side bolster adjustment
Massage function (PULSE)
Rear seats (Maybach 57)
1
2
3
4
Lumbar region support
Shoulder region support
Side bolster adjustment
Massage function (PULSE)
Controls in detail
Seats
The switches for the rear seats on
Maybach 62 are located on the outer side
of the seat.
Lumbar region support
Massage function (PULSE)
Press k or j on rocker
You can reduce muscle tension during
long trips by periodically using the massage function.
switch 1.
This selects the air cushion you wish
to adjust.
Press æ or ç on rocker
switch 1.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
i
Press æ or ç on switch 2.
The massage function switches off
automatically after approximately
8 minutes. The indicator lamp goes
out.
Rear seats (Maybach 62)
Lumbar region support
Shoulder region support
Side bolster adjustment
Massage function (PULSE)
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
The indicator lamp on button 4
comes on. The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate rhythmically.
Shoulder region support
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
1
2
3
4
Press button 4.
Side bolster adjustment
Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 3.
i
When the engine is turned off, the
last cushion setting is retained in
memory, and the cushion is automatically adjusted to this setting when
the engine is restarted.
149
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating
The red indicator lamps in the switch
show the heating level selected:
The switch is located on the respective
door.
i
If one or all of the lamps on the seat
heating switch are flashing, there is
insufficient voltage due to too many
electrical consumers are turned on.
The seat heating switches off automatically.
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level).
After approximately
5 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 2.
2
Two indicator lamps on.
After approximately
10 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 1.
1
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level).
After approximately
20 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched off.
off
No indicator lamp on.
i
The rear center seat* cannot be heated.
150
Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in-
dicator lamps in the switch go out.
Level
3
Switching off seat heating
Example illustration from Maybach with seat
ventilation*
1 Seat heating switch
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Switching on seat heating
Press switch 1.
Three red indicator lamps in the
switch come on.
Continue pressing switch 1 until de-
sired seat heating level is reached.
The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation*
The switch is located on the respective
door.
i
Switching off seat ventilation
The rear center seat* cannot be ventilated.
Press switch 1 ( page 151) repeat-
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Switching on seat ventilation
Press switch 1.
Three blue indicator lamps in the
switch come on.
Continue pressing switch 1 until the
desired seat ventilation level is
reached.
1 Seat ventilation switch
i
The blue indicator lamps in the switch
show the ventilation level selected:
The seat ventilation for the driver’s
seat can be activated using summer
opening feature ( page 235).
Level
3
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level).
2
Two indicator lamps on.
1
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level).
off
No indicator lamp on.
edly until all indicator lamps go out.
i
If one or all of the lamps flash on the
seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being switched on.
The seat ventilation switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back
on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
151
Controls in detail
Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver
should check and adjust the seat height,
seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The
head restraint should also be adjusted
for proper height. See also the section on
airbags ( page 89) for proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and
outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 210.2.
152
With the memory function you can store
up to five different settings.
The following settings are stored for
each stored position when using the buttons on the driver’s door:
Driver’s seat, backrest and head restraint position
Settings for driver’s multicontour seat
Steering wheel position
Interior rear view mirror position
Exterior rear view mirrors position
The following settings are stored for
each stored position when using the buttons on the passenger door and the rear
doors:
Front and rear outer seats, backrest
and head restraint positions
Settings for front and rear outer multicontour seats
Warning!
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Memory function
The memory button and stored position
buttons are located on the respective
door.
Storing positions in memory
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
mirrors to the desired position
( page 65).
On the driver’s side: adjust the steering wheel ( page 68) and the rear
view mirrors ( page 70) to the de-
sired position.
Press memory button M.
Release memory button M and push
memory position button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
within 3 seconds.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Memory button M
2 Memory position buttons 1 - 5
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
or
All the settings are stored at the selected position.
Recalling positions from memory
!
Do not operate the power seats using
the memory button if the seat backrest is in an extremely reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to
front or rear seats.
First move seat backrest to an upright
position.
Press and hold memory position
button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 until the seat,
steering wheel and mirrors have fully
moved to the stored positions.
i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored positions.
Open the respective door.
153
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position
For easier parking you can adjust the passenger exterior rear view mirror so that
you can see the right rear wheel as soon
as you engage reverse gear R.
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
Press button 1.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 2 so that you see the
rear wheel and the road curb.
For information on activating the parking position, see “Activating exterior
rear view mirror parking position”
( page 208).
Press memory button 3.
Within 3 seconds, press bottom of ad-
justment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
1 Exterior rear view mirror (passengerside)
2 Adjustment button
3 Memory button M
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
Make sure the ignition is switched on
( page 62).
154
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is
stored, you can move the mirror
again.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
“Switching on headlamps” ( page 78)
and “Turn signals” ( page 79).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on
the dashboard to the left of the steering
wheel.
i
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps1
monitor your steering angle and driving speed, then automatically shift
their beams to either side to better
follow the curvature of the road
ahead, increasing usable illumination
over conventional headlamps.
1
Off
Daytime running lamp mode
( page 157)
U
Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
( page 157)
If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the
road than the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the
headlamps modified for symmetrical
low beams. Relevant information can
be obtained at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
i
M
Exterior lamp switch
C
Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
B
Low beam headlamps (or high
beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward) and parking lamps
ˆ
Standing lamps, right (turn left
one stop)
‚
Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
C
Indicator lamp for parking lamps
‡
Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
†
Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
If equipped.
155
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
G
With the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the engine turned
off with KEYLESS-GO** and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on.
Warning!
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses
bright ambient light, for example light
from oncoming traffic.
The message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears
in the multifunction display.
the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions.
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with
the exterior lamp switch.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light:
Low beam headlamps
Tail and parking lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps
156
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible
for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at
all times.
i
The front fog lamps and rear fog
lamp cannot be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in
position U. To activate the fog
lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to
position B and pull the exterior
lamp switch to first or second stop
( page 158).
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/
stop button pressed once, only the
parking lamps will switch on and off
automatically.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps,
and the side marker lamps will switch
on and off automatically.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
Canada only
USA only
Turn exterior lamp switch to
The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
By default, the daytime running lamp
mode is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see “Setting daytime
running lamp mode (USA only)”
( page 191).
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
tail and parking lamps
license plate lamps
side marker lamps
For nighttime driving you should turn
the exterior lamp switch to position B
to permit activation of the high beam
headlamps.
i
With the daytime running lamp
mode activated and the exterior lamp
switch in position M, the high
beam headlamps cannot be switched
on.
When the engine is running, and you
shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam headlamps
will switch off with a 3-minute delay.
When the engine is running, and you
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps
switch on additionally.
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on ( page 459).
When the engine is running, and you
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C or B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on ( page 459).
Locator lighting and night security illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system section under “Setting locator
lighting” ( page 192) and “Setting
night security illumination”
( page 193).
The high beam flasher is available at
all times.
157
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
Switching on fog lamps
Warning!
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position U
to B with the vehicle at a standstill in
a safe location. Switching from U to
B will briefly switch off the headlamps.
Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an accident.
Fog lamps cannot be switched on
with exterior lamp switch in
position U. For switching on the
fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch
to position B first.
Switching on front fog lamps
Switch on the low beam headlamps
( page 78).
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be
used in conjunction with low beam
headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
regarding permissible lamp operation.
158
The front fog lamps are switched on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
( page 155).
Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps are switched off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
Switching on rear fog lamp (driver’s side
only)
Switch on the front fog lamps
( page 158).
Pull out exterior lamp switch to sec-
ond stop.
The rear fog lamp is switched on.
The green indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
( page 155).
Push in the exterior lamp switch to
first stop.
The rear fog lamp is switched off.
The green indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Pull the combination switch in direc-
tion of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.
High beam flasher
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
High beam
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B or U ( page 155).
Push the combination switch in direc-
tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high
beam.
Cornering lamps
Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with cornering
lamps. If equipped, the cornering lamps
allow you to better light up the road in
front of you when you are turning the
vehicle around a curve.
Cornering lamps will operate with the
engine running and with:
the exterior lamp switch in
position B ( page 155) or
the exterior lamp switch in
position U ( page 155) or
the daytime running lamp mode activated ( page 191)
i
Cornering lamps will only come on in
low ambient lighting conditions.
The cornering lamps function is not
available at a vehicle speed above
25 mph (40 km/h).
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on.
159
Controls in detail
Lighting
Driving forward
Switching on cornering lamps
Depending on whether you are turn-
ing left or right, switch on the left or
right turn signal ( page 79).
The respective cornering lamp comes
on and illuminates the road onto
which you are turning.
i
The cornering lamps will come on automatically up to a speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) depending
on the steering angle, even if you did
not switch on either turn signal. If the
cornering lamps came on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering
angle.
160
Switching off the cornering lamps
The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major
steering wheel movements. This will
switch off the cornering lamps if they
were activated by switching on the left
or right turn signal.
If the turn signal should stay on after
making the turn, the turn signal and cornering lamp can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its
original position.
i
If you are driving faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h) when activating the turn
signal indicator, the cornering lamp
function is switched off.
Driving rearward
Switching on cornering lamps
Place the gear selector lever in
position R.
The inverse cornering lamp comes on
automatically depending on the
steering direction and steering angle.
Switching off cornering lamps
Place the gear selector lever out of
position R.
The respective cornering lamp goes
out.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle.
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an airbag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the front center console.
Switching on the hazard warning flasher
Press the hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
Press hazard warning flasher
All turn signals flash.
switch 1 again.
i
i
With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the
respective left or right turn signal will
operate when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is in position 1 or 2 or
the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
( page 63) is pressed once or twice.
If the hazard warning flasher was
activated automatically, also press
hazard warning flasher switch 1 to
switch off the hazard warning flasher.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
161
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting in the front
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
Automatic control
Deactivating
Press automatic control switch 3
1
2
3
4
5
Left front reading lamp on/off
Rear interior lighting on/off
Automatic control on/off
Front interior lighting on/off
Right front reading lamp on/off
!
Leaving an interior light switch in the
ON position for extended periods of
time with the engine turned off could
result in a discharged battery.
162
For more information, see “Setting interior lighting delayed switch-off”
( page 194).
again.
i
The interior lighting remains
switched off in darkness, even when
you:
If the door remains open, the interior
lighting switches off automatically
after approximately 5 minutes.
unlock the vehicle
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically.
open a door
Activating
Press automatic control switch 3.
The interior lighting switches on in
darkness when you:
the vehicle is unlocked
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
open a door
The interior lighting are switched off after a preset time ( page 194).
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Front interior lighting
Press front interior lighting switch 4.
The front interior lighting switches
on.
Press front interior lighting switch 4
again.
The front interior lighting switches
off.
Rear interior lighting
Press rear interior lighting switch 2.
The rear interior lighting switches on.
Press rear interior lighting switch 2
again.
The rear interior lighting switches
off.
Interior lighting in the rear
The control panel is located between the
rear seats.
!
Leaving an interior light switch in the
ON position for extended periods of
time with the engine turned off could
result in a discharged battery.
Front reading lamps
The front reading lamps are integrated
into the interior rear view mirror.
Press front reading lamp switch 1
or 5 to switch on the desired front
reading lamp.
Press front reading lamp switch 1
or 5 again to switch off the respective front reading lamp.
163
Controls in detail
Lighting
Maybach 57 with rear door window curtains*
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Ambient lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting
5 Rear interior lighting on/off
164
Maybach 57 with rear door window curtains*
(vehicles with rear center seat*)
Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains*
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Ambient lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting
5 Rear interior lighting on/off
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Rear interior lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting
5 Ambient lighting on/off
Controls in detail
Lighting
Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains* (vehicles with rear center seat*)
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Rear interior lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting
5 Ambient lighting on/off
Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Headliner lamps/pillar uplights on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting/headliner lamps/pillar uplights
5 Ambient lighting on/off
6 Rear interior lighting on/off
Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles
with rear center seat* in storage compartment/drawer)
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Headliner lamps/pillar uplights on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting/headliner lamps/pillar uplights
5 Ambient lighting on/off
6 Rear interior lighting on/off
165
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Rear interior lighting
Press the switch at the ò symbol to
switch the rear interior lighting on.
Press the switch at the ò symbol
again to switch the rear interior lighting off.
Rear reading lamps
Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof*
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Roof lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting/roof lighting
5 Ambient lighting on/off
6 Rear interior lighting on/off
166
Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof*
(vehicles with rear center seat* in storage
compartment/drawer)
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Roof lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting/roof lighting
5 Ambient lighting on/off
6 Rear interior lighting on/off
Press respective switch 1 or 2
at X symbol to switch the corresponding rear reading lamps on.
Press respective switch 1 or 2
at X symbol again to switch the
corresponding rear reading lamps
off.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Ambient lighting
Headliner lamps and pillar uplights*
Electrotransparent roof lighting*
The ambient lighting switches on and off
automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
In Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof,
the headliner and pillar can be illuminated.
In Maybach 62 with an electrotransparent roof, the roof lining can be illuminated when the screen is closed.
You can switch on or off ambient lighting manually.
Press switch 3 to switch the headlin-
Press switch 3 to switch the roof
Press the switch at the ð symbol to
Press switch 3 to switch the headlin-
switch the ambient lighting on.
er lamps and pillar uplights on.
er lamps and pillar uplights off.
lighting on.
Press switch 3 to switch the roof
lighting off.
Press the switch at the ð symbol to
switch the ambient lighting off.
Dimming ambient lighting, headliner
lamps and pillar uplights* and roof lighting*
Turn thumbwheel 4 until the cur-
rent ambient lighting has reached
the desired intensity.
167
Controls in detail
Lighting
Courtesy lighting
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy lamps will illuminate the interior of
your vehicle as follows.
With the automatic control activated:
the inside door handles
the driver’s and passenger footwells
rear passengers’ footwells
(only Maybach 62)
With the automatic control activated
and the starter switch position 1
( page 62):
the inside door handles
the center console
i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off
the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.
168
Door entry lamps
For better orientation in the dark, the
corresponding door entry lamps will
switch on in darkness when you open a
door and the automatic control is activated.
The door entry lamps switch off when
the corresponding door is closed.
i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off
the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting switches on if the
trunk is opened.
If the trunk remains open, the trunk
lighting switches off automatically after
approximately 10 minutes.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster, see “At a glance”
( page 24).
If you open a door or press reset
button J without turning on the ignition or the light, the multifunction display is only illuminated for
approximately 30 seconds.
Instrument cluster illumination
You can change the instrument cluster
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system
( page 190).
Warning!
1 Reset button J
The instrument cluster is activated when
you:
open a door
switch on the ignition ( page 62)
press reset button J
switch on the exterior lamps
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions,
such as speed or outside temperature,
warning/ indicator lamps, malfunction/
warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
1 Knob for instrument cluster illumination
Use the knob for instrument cluster illumination 1 to adjust the illumination
brightness for the instrument cluster.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically
to suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination
will also be adjusted automatically
when you switch on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
169
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Press the knob for instrument cluster
!
Coolant temperature gauge
illumination.
The knob will pop out.
To brighten illumination
Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may
have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
Turn the knob clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination
will brighten.
To dim illumination
Turn the knob in the instrument clus-
ter counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination
will dim.
170
G
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
Excessive coolant temperature trigger a warning in the multifunction
display ( page 433).
The engine should not be operated
with the coolant temperature above
248° F (120°C), i.e. in the red zone of
the coolant temperature gauge. Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
i
During severe operating conditions,
e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise close to 248°F
(120°C), i.e. close to the red zone of
the coolant temperature gauge.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Trip odometer
Make sure you are viewing the trip
odometer display ( page 173).
If it is not displayed, press
button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until
the trip odometer appears in the multifunction display ( page 173).
Press and hold reset button J
( page 169) in the instrument clus-
ter until the trip odometer is reset.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by
the Maybach Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking.
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice. The road may
still be icy, especially in wooded areas or
on bridges.
The outside temperature is indicated in
the instrument cluster for the driver
( page 25) and in the roof lining
for the rear seat passengers
( pages 33, 35, 37 or 39).
171
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during
idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can
only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not
by comparison to external displays (e.g.
bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving
your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate
temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling
or slow driving.
172
Speedometer
The speed is indicated in the instrument
cluster for the driver ( page 25) and in
the roof lining for the rear seat passengers ( pages 33, 35, 37 or 39).
The segments in the speedometer of the
instrument cluster show you which speed
range is available to you.
Cruise control operation:
Segments come on from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
Distronic** operation:
One or two segments come on in the
range for the stored speed.
Clock
The time is indicated in the instrument
cluster for the driver in the tachometer
display ( page 25) and in the roof lining
for the rear seat passengers
( pages 33, 35, 37 or 39).
You can adjust the clock using the
COMAND system. Refer to the separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual
System operating instructions.
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or the
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button is
pressed once ( page 63). The control
system enables you to
call up information about your vehicle
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the multifunction display,
and much more.
i
The displays for the audio systems
(radio, CD player) will appear in English, regardless of the language
selected.
Warning!
G
Multifunction display
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions
permit it to be done safely.
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
173
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
1 Multifunction display
Operating control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume:
Press button
æ
up/to increase
ç
down/to decrease
3 Telephone:
Press button
s
to take a call
to dial a call
t
to end a call
to reject an incoming call
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è
for next menu
ÿ
for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
174
j
for next display
k
for previous display
Controls in detail
Control system
Depending on the selected menu
( page 176), pressing the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction
display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus,
each containing a number of functions
or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD
operations under AUDIO, for example).
These functions serve to call up relevant
information or to customize the settings
for your vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and
the functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through
each menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through
each function display, one after the
other, in the current menu.
In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions you will find a number of submenus
for calling up and changing settings. For
instructions on using these submenus,
see “Settings menu” ( page 187).
The number of menus available in the
system depends on which optional
equipment is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following pages.
175
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
176
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Menu 5
Menu 6
Standard
display
Audio
Telephone
Navigation
Distronic**
Trip computer Vehicle status mes- Settings
sage memory1
( page 178) ( page 179) ( page 181) ( page 184) ( page 184) ( page 185)
Commands/submenus
Call up main- Select radio
tenance ser- station
vice display
Load phone
book
Show route Call up
guidance in- settings
structions,
current direction traveled
Menu 7
( page 186)
Menu 8
( page 187)
Fuel consump- Call up vehicle mal- Reset to faction statistics
function, warning tory settings
after start
and system status
messages stored in
memory
Check tire in- Select satel- Search for
flation pres- lite radio sta- name in
sure
tion*
phone book
Fuel consumption statistics
since the last
reset
Instrument
cluster
submenu
Check enOperate the
gine oil level CD player
Call up range
Lighting
submenu
Digital
speedometer
Vehicle
submenu
Convenience
submenu
1
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
177
Controls in detail
Control system
i
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
Standard display menu
In basic mode, the multifunction display
shows the trip odometer and the main
odometer. This is known as the standard
display.
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Calling up maintenance service
display
396
Checking tire inflation pressure
375
Checking engine oil level
358
Calling up digital speedometer
178
Calling up digital speedometer
Press button k or j repeatedly
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
until the digital speedometer appears
in the multifunction display.
In case you see another display:
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the standard display appears.
Press button k or j repeatedly
to select the functions in the standard
display menu.
Current vehicle speed
178
Controls in detail
Control system
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
Audio menu
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in
the multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Selecting radio station
179
Selecting satellite radio station
(USA only)
179
Operating the CD player
180
Selecting radio station
Turn on COMAND and select radio.
Refer to the separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display.
until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display.
1 Waveband
2 Station frequency
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
i
You can only store new stations using
the corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to the separate COMAND
and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System
operating instructions.
Selecting satellite radio station
(USA only)
The SIRIUS satellite radio is treated as a
radio application.
Turn on COMAND and select the cor-
responding key on the COMAND
control panel. Refer to the separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
1 Channel name or number
2 SAT mode and preset number
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.
i
A subscription to satellite radio service provider is required for satellite
radio operation. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for details.
For more information, refer to the
separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions.
179
Controls in detail
Control system
Operating the CD player
Select MP3-CD track
Turn on COMAND and select CD. Re-
Turn on COMAND and select MP3-CD.
fer to the separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Refer to the separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the multifunction display.
1 Current track
2 Indicates CD mode
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
You can only choose a CD using
COMAND. Refer to the separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
180
until the settings for the MP3-CD currently being played are shown in the
multifunction display.
1 Current track
2 Indicates MP3-CD mode
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
Level of information displayed will
vary depending on the information
contained on the MP3-CD.
Controls in detail
Control system
Telephone menu
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving. For your safety and
the safety of others, we recommend that
you pull over to a safe location and stop
before making or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when weather,
road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
without being connected to an external
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/
or personal injury.
You can use the functions in the PHONE
menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system
and switched on.
Logging-on to a network
Switch on the telephone and
COMAND.
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you
see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display.
The standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can
operate it using the control system.
You may carry out the following functions:
Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether
your telephone is switched on or off:
Function
Dialing a number from the
phone book
182
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: PLEASE
TURN PHONE ON.
Redialing
183
Answering a call
183
If the telephone is switched on:
Ending a call
183
Page
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the multifunction display reads NO SERVICE.
If the telephone is on:
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY appears in the multifunction display.
181
Controls in detail
Control system
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from
the phone book.
Log on to the network ( page 181).
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the PHONE menu in the
multifunction display.
Press button j or k.
If you have just switched on the
phone, the control system transmit
the phone books of the SIM card
(GSM) or the phone books of the mobile phones (GSM or CDMA).
This can take several minutes, depending on how many entries each
phone book contains. When you
press button j or k during the
download of the phone book the
message LOADING PHBOOK! appears in
the multifunction display for approximately 3 seconds.
182
Press button j or k repeatedly
Press button s.
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
If the connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and the
duration of the call will appear in the
multifunction display.
i
If you press and hold button j
or k for longer than 1 second, the
system scrolls rapidly through the list
of names until you release the button
again.
If you do not want to use the telephone, press button t.
1 Caller’s name
i
If no connection is made, the control
system stores each dialed number in
the redial memory.
Controls in detail
Control system
Redialing
Answering a call
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your
entire phone book.
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the multifunction display you will then
see the message:
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
Press button t.
Press button s.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
i
If you do not want to use the telephone, press button t.
You have answered the call. In the
multifunction display you see the
length of the call positioned above
the number.
Ending a call
until you see the PHONE menu in the
multifunction display.
In the multifunction display you see
the first number in the redial memory.
Press button s.
You have ended the call. In the multifunction display you will again see
the standby message.
i
The caller’s number appears only if it
is transmitted.
The caller’s name appears only if the
number and the name are stored in
the phone book.
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
183
Controls in detail
Control system
Navigation menu
The NAVI menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
until you see NAVI in the multifunction display.
Distronic** menu
Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system. What information is shown in the
multifunction display depends on
whether the Distronic system is active or
inactive.
If COMAND is switched off, the message NAVI OFF is shown in the multifunction display.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual ( page 251) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.
With COMAND switched on but route
guidance not activated, the direction
of travel and, if available, the name
of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
With COMAND switched on and
route guidance activated, the direction of travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction
display.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following
two pictures in the multifunction display.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning function
Distronic activated
Distronic deactivated
When Distronic is deactivated, you will
see the standard display.
When you activate Distronic, you will see
the set speed for about 5 seconds in the
Distronic display. The following display
then appears:
Please refer to the separate COMAND
and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System manual for instructions on how to activate
the route guidance system.
1 Distronic activated
184
Controls in detail
Control system
Incorporating statistics from the previous journey in the consumption statistics
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle. The following information is available:
Function
When you restart the engine, the
AFTER START display flashes for:
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after
start
185
Fuel consumption statistics since
last reset
186
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
186
Distance to empty
186
Fuel consumption statistics after start
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see AFTER START in the multifunction display.
1
2
3
4
Distance driven since start
Time elapsed since start
Average fuel consumption since start
Average speed since start
a distance of approximately
1.25 miles (2 kilometers)
or
a duration of 2 minutes
During this period, the data from the
previous journey can be incorporated as
follows:
Press reset button J ( page 169) in
the instrument cluster.
The statistics will be incorporated.
i
If you do not press reset button J,
the consumption statistics will be reset to 0.
i
Each time you call up the trip computer, the last function used appears
as the first display.
185
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption since last reset
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see AFTER RESET in the multifunction display.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you
want to reset in the multifunction
display.
Press and hold reset button J
( page 169) in the instrument clus-
ter until the value is reset to 0.
Distance to empty
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
Vehicle status message memory
menu
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
The vehicle status message memory
menu only appears if there are any messages stored.
Press button j or k repeatedly
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
4 Average speed since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
186
G
until you see RANGE in the multifunction display.
Warning!
In the multifunction display you will
see the calculated range based on the
current fuel tank level.
Malfunction and warning messages are
only indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply
a reminder with respect to the operation
of certain systems and do not replace the
owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to
maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by
having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by
bringing the vehicle to an authorized
Maybach Studio to address the malfunction and warning messages ( page 417).
Controls in detail
Control system
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, then there
are no messages stored.
Vehicle status messages have been recorded
If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number
of messages appears in the multifunction
display:
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the “Practical
hints” section for malfunction and
warning messages ( page 417).
Settings menu
In the SETTINGS menu there are two
functions:
The function TO RESET PRESS R BUTTON
FOR 3 SEC., with which you can reset
all the settings to the original factory
settings.
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
i
The vehicle status message memory
will be cleared when you switch off
the ignition. You will then only see
high-priority messages in the multifunction display. These are highlighted in red color ( page 417).
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see SETTINGS in the multifunction display.
1 Number of messages
187
Controls in detail
Control system
Function
Page
Resetting all settings
188
Submenus in the Settings menu
188
Instrument cluster submenu
190
Lighting submenu
191
Vehicle submenu
195
Convenience submenu
195
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.
Press reset button J ( page 169) in
the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press reset button J again to confirm.
Press reset button J again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
i
Submenus in the Settings menu
The settings you have changed will
not be reset unless you confirm the
action by pressing reset button J
a second time. After approximately
5 seconds, the SETTINGS menu appears again.
Press button j.
The various submenus appear in the
multifunction display.
Due to safety reasons, resetting all of
the settings while driving will not reset all of the values in the LIGHTING or
the VEHICLE submenu.
Press button æ or ç.
The selection marker moves to the
next submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll down with button ç, scroll
up with button æ.
With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use button j to access the
individual functions within that submenu. Once within the submenu, you
can use button j to move to the next
function or button k to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
188
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LIGHTING
VEHICLE
CONVENIENCE
Selecting speedometer display Setting daytime running lamp Setting automatic locking
mode
mode (USA only)
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature
Selecting language
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors
Setting locator lighting
Setting night security illumination
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Setting ambient lighting
189
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting speedometer display mode
Access the INST. CLUS. submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUS. submenu to change the instrument cluster
display settings. The following functions
are available:
Move the selection marker with
Function
Page
Selecting speedometer display
mode
190
Selecting language
190
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
button æ or ç to the INST.
CLUS. submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see DISPLAY VALUES IN in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the multifunction display messages.
Available languages:
Press button æ or ç to set
speedometer unit to MILES or KM.
Selecting language
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the INST.
CLUS. submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see LANGUAGE in the multifunction display.
190
German
English
French
Italian
Spanish
Controls in detail
Control system
Move the selection marker with
Lighting submenu
Access the LIGHTING submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu to change the lamp and lighting
settings on your vehicle. The following
functions are available:
Function
Page
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see LIGHTING CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps
For more information on the daytime
running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
( page 157).
Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)
191
Setting locator lighting
192
i
Setting night security illumination
193
Setting interior lighting delayed
shut-off
194
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the respective
lamp(s) will switch on.
Setting ambient lighting
194
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
i
This function is not available in countries where the daytime running
lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
Press button æ or ç to select
MANUAL or daytime running lamp
CONSTANT mode. This function is not
available in countries where daytime
running lamps are mandatory.
With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the engine is running.
For safety reasons, resetting
the LIGHTING submenu to factory settings ( page 188) while driving will
not reset the daytime running lamp
mode.
In the display you will then see the
message:
LIGHTING
CANNOT BE
COMPLETELY RESET
TO FACTORY SETTINGS
WHILE DRIVING.
191
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting
With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked using button ‹ on
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps
Front fog lamps
Exterior rear view mirrors
192
The locator lighting switches off when
the driver’s door is opened.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
lamps will switch off automatically after
approximately 40 seconds.
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you LOCATOR LIGHTING in the multifunction display.
Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function ON.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle ( page 155).
The locator lighting feature is activated.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed switch-off)
Use this function to set whether you
would like the exterior lamps to remain
on for 15 seconds during darkness after
exiting the vehicle and all doors closed.
With the delayed shut-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position U before the engine is turned
off, the following lamps will remain lit
when the engine is turned off:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps
Front fog lamps
If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door or do not close an opened
door, the lamps will automatically switch
off after 60 seconds.
To select delayed shut-off period:
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see HEADLAMPS DELAYED
SWITCH-OFF in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
You can temporarily deactivate the
headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 2 and back to 0.
The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as
you reinsert the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton on the gear selector lever
( page 63).
Press button æ or ç to switch
the headlamps delayed shut-off function ON.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the
engine ( page 155).
193
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting interior lighting delayed
switch-off
Use this function to set whether you
would like the interior lighting to remain
lit for 10 seconds during darkness after
you have removed the SmartKey from
the starter switch.
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see INTERIOR LIGHTING DELAYED SWITCH-OFF in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
194
Press button æ or ç to switch
the interior lighting delayed shut-off
function ON.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Setting ambient lighting
Use this function, you can adjust the
brightness of the ambient lighting.
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see AMBIENT LIGHT in the
multifunction display.
Press button æ or ç to select the
brightness of the lighting.
The setting LEVEL 1 represents the
darkest level and setting LEVEL 5 the
brightest level.
The ambient light is switched off at
setting OFF.
Controls in detail
Control system
Press button j or k repeatedly
Vehicle submenu
Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The
following functions are available:
Function
until you see AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK in
the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Convenience submenu
Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features. The
following functions are available:
Page
Set automatic locking
Function
195
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking. With
the automatic central locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
Page
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
196
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors
196
Press button æ or ç to switch
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF.
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the VEHICLE
submenu.
195
Controls in detail
Control system
Move the selection marker with
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
( page 69).
Warning!
button æ or ç to
the CONVENIENCE submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE in the multifunction display.
G
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
Move the selection marker to
the CONVENIENCE submenu using
button æ or ç.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message FOLD IN MIRRORS
WHEN LOCKING appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
To stop steering wheel adjustment, do one
of the following:
Move steering column stalk
( page 68).
Press seat adjustment switch
( page 66).
Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M
( page 153).
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door
and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
196
Press button æ or ç to switch the
easy-entry/exit feature ON or OFF.
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors
Using this function, you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automatically
folded in when you lock your vehicle
folded out when you unlock your vehicle
Press button æ or ç to switch the
automatic fold-in setting for the mirrors ON or OFF.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
For information on driving with an automatic transmission see “Automatic transmission” ( page 75).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its
gear shifting process to your individual
driving style by continually adjusting the
shift points up or down. These shift point
adjustments are performed based on
current operating and driving conditions.
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of
all obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program.
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending
on:
the gear selector lever position D
( page 199) with gear
ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 ( page 202)
the selected program mode (C/S)
( page 203)
the position of the accelerator pedal
( page 201)
the vehicle speed
i
During the brief warm-up the transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat
up more quickly to operating temperature.
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
197
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
1 Current gear range/gear selector
lever position
2 Current program mode
The current gear range/gear selector
lever position and program mode (C/S)
appear in the tachometer display.
198
!
G
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for
an extended period when driving off
on slippery road surfaces. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission shifting by:
limiting the gear range
changing gears manually
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
Effect
The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector
lever is locked in position P.
Effect
ì
Park position
Gear selector position when
the vehicle is parked. Only
place gear selector lever in
position P when vehicle is
stopped. The park position is
not intended to serve as a
brake when the vehicle is
parked. Rather, the driver
should always set the parking
brake in addition to placing
the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the
vehicle.
í
Effect
ë
Neutral
No power is transmitted from
the engine to the drive axle.
When the brakes are released,
the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed).
Reverse gear
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Only move gear selector lever
to N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
ê
Drive
The transmission shifts automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
199
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for
any other reason with gear selector
lever in N can result in transmission
damage that is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in
position P is dangerous. Also, position P
alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly
hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P ( page 77).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
200
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could move the gear selector lever from position P, which could result in
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Stopping
Maneuvering
Accelerator position
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic
lights:
When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g.
when pulling into a parking space:
Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:
Leave the transmission in gear.
Control the vehicle speed by gradual-
Driving tips
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
More throttle
Later upshifting
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
When you stop longer with the engine
idling and/or on a hill:
Kickdown
Set the parking brake.
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
Move gear selector lever to
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Ease up on the accelerator when you
position P.
ly releasing the brakes.
Accelerate gently.
Never abruptly step on the accelera-
tor.
Working on the vehicle
Warning!
G
When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to
position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll
away.
have reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
201
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in
position D, you can select a gear range
for the automatic transmission to
operate within.
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the gear selector lever to the left (D-),
and reverse the gear range limit by
pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+).
The selected gear range will appear in
the tachometer display ( page 198). If
you press on the accelerator when the
engine has reached its rpm limit, the
transmission will upshift beyond any
gear range limit selected.
202
Effect
Effect
é
The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
ç
è
The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
on steep downgrades
in mountainous regions
under extreme operating
conditions
æ
The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic shift program
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the front
center console.
!
Never change the program mode
when the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
i
The last selected program mode
(C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted.
Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the letter
of the desired program mode
appears in the tachometer display.
Select C for comfort driving:
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine
then operates at lower rpms and
the wheels are less likely to spin.
1 Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (C/S) are
indicated in the tachometer display
( page 198).
203
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission,
you can change the gears manually and
limit or extend the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector
lever in position D.
!
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for
an extended period when driving off
on slippery road surfaces. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
204
Upshifting
Downshifting
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This
could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS
will not prevent this type of loss of control.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D– direction.
The transmission will shift from the
current gear to the next lower gear as
permitted by the shift program. This
action simultaneously limits the gear
range of the transmission
( page 202).
i
To avoid overrevving the engine
when the gear selector lever is moved
to the D– direction, the transmission
will not shift to a lower gear if the
engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the
current gear to the next higher gear
as permitted by the shift program.
This action simultaneously extends
the gear range of the transmission.
Canceling gear range limit
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears
in the tachometer display.
The transmission will shift from the
current gear range directly to gear
range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D– direction.
The transmission will automatically
select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration.
This may involve shifting down one
or more gears.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Emergency operation
(Limp-home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in Limp-home (emergency operation) Mode. In this mode only
second gear and reverse gear can be selected.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
Move gear selector lever to P.
Turn off the engine.
Wait at least 10 seconds before re-
starting.
Restart the engine.
Move gear selector lever to
position D (for second gear) or R.
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Maybach Studio as soon
as possible.
205
Controls in detail
Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers, see “Windshield wipers”
( page 80).
Headlamp cleaning system
The button is located on the left side of
the dashboard.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
i
switched on the headlamps
and
operated the windshield wipers
with windshield washer fluid
fifteen times
the auto-dimming function is activated ( page 207)
the ignition is switched on
When you switch off the ignition, the
counter resets.
1 Headlamp washer button
206
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
The headlamps will automatically be
cleaned when you have
Rear view mirrors
For information on setting the rear view
mirrors, see “Mirrors” ( page 70).
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield and headlamp
washer system” ( page 501).
and
incoming light from headlamps falls
on the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror
The rear view mirror will not react if
reverse gear is engaged
the interior lighting is turned on
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Warning!
G
The auto-dimming function does not react
if incoming light is not aimed directly at
sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do
not react, for example, if the rear window
curtain is closed.
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning!
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
!
Deactivating
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in
mirror are closer than they appear. Check
your interior rear view mirror or glance
over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press button 1.
The green indicator lamp in
button 1 goes out.
Activating
Press button 1 again.
The green indicator lamp in
button 1 comes on.
i
The setting will remain stored even
when you remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch.
207
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passengerside exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror ( page 154).
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press button 2 for the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror.
Place the gear selector lever in re-
verse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to
the stored position.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to
its previously stored driving position:
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
208
10 seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
immediately once you exceed a vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)
immediately when you press the button for driver’s side exterior rear view
mirror 1
Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors
Warning!
G
With the exterior rear view mirrors folded
in when driving the vehicle, you cannot
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
which could result in an accident. Before
driving the vehicle, make sure the exterior
rear view mirrors are folded out.
!
Before you drive the vehicle through
an automatic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Otherwise they may be
damaged.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Folding exterior rear view mirrors in and
out automatically
Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in
and out manually
When the corresponding function in the
control system is activated ( page 196):
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate
if they are not completely folded out.
The button is located on the driver’s
door.
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle
is locked from the outside.
i
If you are driving at more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), you
will not be able to fold the exterior
mirrors in.
Press button 1 again.
The mirrors fold out.
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver’s or
passenger door are subsequently
opened.
!
If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear), reposition it manually by applying firm pressure until it snaps back
into place.
1 Button for folding exterior mirrors in
and out
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Briefly press button 1.
The mirrors fold in.
If an exterior mirror is forcibly pushed
rearward (hit from the front) press
button 1 to fold mirrors in, then
press button 1 to fold mirrors out.
Do not force mirror by hand as it may
damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is now properly
positioned and you can adjust the
mirror normally.
209
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
Glare from the front
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
i
1 Sun visor
For information on vanity mirrors
( page 281).
Swing sun visor 1 down.
Glare from the front and sides
!
Close the vanity mirror cover (if open)
before you disengage sun visor 1
from mounting 2 and pivot it to the
side.
1 Sun visor
2 Mounting
3 Additional sun visor
Swing sun visor 1 down.
Disengage sun visor 1 from
mounting 2.
Pivot sun visor to the side.
The sun visors are extendable.
Adjust the sun visors by pushing or
pulling in direction of the arrows.
Swing additional sun visor 3 down.
210
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster consumes
high levels of energy. To keep battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear. The heating time varies depending
on outside temperature and driving conditions, ranging from approximately
6 minutes at temperatures above 43°F
(6°C) to over 20 minutes at temperatures
below -14°F (-26°C) and at high speed.
Warning!
Activating
i
Press button F ( page 214).
If the indicator lamp F is flashing,
there is insufficient voltage due to
too many electrical consumers are
turned on. The rear window defroster switches off automatically.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
Press button F again.
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out.
The rear window defroster will switch
back on again automatically as soon
as sufficient voltage is available.
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should
be removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
211
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is a 4-zone
intelligent climate control system. Your
vehicle interior is divided into four zones.
With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and
automatically adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate
control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or
frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep
sufficient distance between unprotected
parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control
( page 214) to direct the air to air vents in
the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It
cools the vehicle’s interior according to
the angle and intensity of the sun’s rays,
the outside temperature and the selected temperature.
i
Condensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
The activated charcoal filter, when
switched on, markedly reduces odors
and removes pollutants from the air entering the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for
heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air
enters the passenger compartment
through the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the air conditioning mode is
deactivated ( page 221).
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of
the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the
air volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off, see
“Summer opening feature”
( page 235). The automatic climate
control will then adjust the interior
temperature to the set value much
faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of
the windshield free of snow, leaves,
sticks and any other debris.
Do not obstruct air volume by placing
objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window.
212
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Cockpit
1 Side air vent, left, adjustable
5 Side air vent, right, adjustable
8 Automatic climate control panel
2 Center air vent, left, adjustable
6 Thumbwheel for right side air vent
3 Fixed air vent
7 Thumbwheel for right center air
vent
9 Thumbwheel for left center air
vent
4 Center air vent, right, adjustable
a Thumbwheel for left side air vent
213
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control panel, front
1 Air distribution and air volume,
left (automatic)
8 Air distribution, right (manual)
d AC cooling on/off
9 Air distribution and air volume,
right (automatic)
e Residual heat and ventilation
2 Air distribution, left (manual)
3 Air volume, left
a Rear window defroster
g Air recirculation
4 Temperature control, left
b Rear air-conditioning remote control
h Front defroster
5 Display
6 Temperature control, right
7 Air volume, right
214
c Automatic climate control on/off
button
f Activated charcoal filter
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating the climate control system
It is possible to completely deactivate the
automatic climate control system.
Deactivating
Press button M ( page 214).
Warning!
G
When the automatic climate control is
switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility
and endangering you and others.
Reactivating
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press button M or U
( page 214)
Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function
can be switched off, if necessary.
i
The automatic climate control system
can also be switched on and off separately on each side of the passenger
compartment, as required.
Use temperature controls 4 for the
left side or 6 ( page 214) for the
right side to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger compartment.
The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
Press one button U ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out. The automatic operation of
air volume and air distribution
switches off.
Activating
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press one button U ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
215
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 4 for the left
side or 6 ( page 214) for the right side
to separately adjust the air temperature
on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments,
preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
Increasing
Push top of temperature control 4
and/or 6 until the display shows the
desired temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.
Decreasing
Push bottom of temperature
control 4 and/or 6 until the display
shows the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.
216
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 2
and 8 ( page 214) to separately adjust
the air distribution on each side of the
passenger compartment. The following
symbols are located on the controls:
Symbol Function
Ô
Directs air to the windows
Ø
Directs air to the windows,
footwells, center and side air
vents
Ó
Õ
Directs air to the footwell air
vents
Directs air to the center and
side air vents
Press left or right air distribution
controls 2 and/or 8 ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out.
The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective
zone.
The selected air distribution is shown
in the display 5 ( page 214).
Adjusting air volume
Seven blower speeds are available.
Press to decrease or Q to in-
crease air volume to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out.
The air volume is controlled manually
while the air distribution is controlled
automatically in the respective zone.
The selected blower speed is shown in
the display 5 ( page 214).
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and
the side windows.
Deactivating
Press button P ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out. Defrosting is turned off.
i
Windshield fogged on the outside
Keep this setting selected only until
the windshield or the side windows
are clear again.
Switch the windshield wipers on.
Activating
Press button P ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The automatic climate control switches
automatically to the following functions:
maximum blowing and heating
power (depends on cooling temperature)
air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
cooling on to dehumidify
the air recirculation mode is
switched off
Press one button U.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
i
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
If the left and right air distribution controls as well as the air volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, the display AUTO MAXCOOL appears.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof are closed).
i
These settings should only be selected for a short time.
In automatic mode, the automatic climate control is regulated to prevent
the windows from fogging up.
217
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the
vehicle from the outside (e.g. before
driving through a tunnel). This setting
cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior
window fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning ( page 231) is activated, or
press button P.
Activating
Press button , ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i
i
The air recirculation mode is activated automatically:
Press and hold button , for approximately 2 seconds. The windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof will close. You
can release button , once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
continue closing until they are fully
closed.
at high outside temperatures
if the concentration of carbon
monoxide (CO) and nitrogen
oxide (NOX) in the outside air increases beyond a predetermined
level, for example in a tunnel
Please note that the charcoal filter
must be activated ( page 214) for
the air recirculation mode to be activated automatically.
If you have turned off the air conditioning ( page 214) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows
can be immediately halted by pressing the
respective window switch. The closing of
the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
halted by moving the tilt/ sliding sunroof
switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction.
The closing of the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding button ,.
218
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating
i
Press button , ( page 214).
Press and hold button , for approximately 2 seconds. The windows
and or tilt/sliding sunroof will return
to their previous position. You can release button , once the opening
procedure has begun. The windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof continue
opening until they have reached their
previous position.
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out.
i
The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below
approximately 41°F (5°C)
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off
after 30 minutes if the outside
temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
if you press button r
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A
quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will
only return to its previous position if
it has not been moved to another position using the respective window
switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch
after it was closed with button ,.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that
was moved will remain in its current
position if button , is used to reopen the remaining windows or tilt/
sliding sunroof.
Charcoal filter
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment.
Activating
Press button e ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i
Press and hold button e for approximately 2 seconds. The windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof will close. You
can release button e once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
continue closing until they are fully
closed.
219
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows
can be immediately halted by pressing the
respective window switch.
The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can
be immediately halted by moving the tilt/
sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction.
The closing of the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding button e.
220
Deactivating
Press button e ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out.
i
Press and hold button e for approximately 2 seconds. The windows
and or tilt/sliding sunroof will return
to their previous position. You can release button e once the opening
procedure has begun. The windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof continue
opening until they have reached their
previous position.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will
only return to its previous position if
it has not been moved to another position using the respective window
switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch
after it was closed with button e.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that
was moved will remain in its current
position if button e is used to reopen the remaining windows or tilt/
sliding sunroof.
The system switches automatically to the
air recirculation mode if the carbon
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level, for example in a tunnel.
The automatic air recirculation mode
does not function if air conditioning is
deactivated ( page 221) or if the outside temperature has fallen below
41°F (5°C).
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on
the inside, or if the passenger compartment needs to be quickly heated or
cooled down.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from
fogging up.
i
Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
Deactivating
!
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in
the vehicle will then no longer be cooled
or dehumidified.
If the indicator lamp on the
button r does not go out or starts
to flash, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned itself off. The
air conditioning cannot be turned on
again.
Press button r ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on the
button r comes on.
Activating
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Maybach
Studio.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You
can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
Press button r again
( page 214).
The indicator lamp on the
button r goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
221
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the
interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.
Deactivating
i
Press button T ( page 214).
How long the system will provide
heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by
the operator. The blower will run at
speed setting 1 regardless of the air
distribution control setting.
Activating
when the ignition is switched on
Turn the SmartKey in the starter
after about 30 minutes
if the battery voltage drops
switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it
from the starter switch.
Press button T ( page 214).
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
222
The indicator lamp on button T
goes out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Temperature-controlled glove box
The glove box can be heated or cooled.
The air temperature is regulated according to the outside temperature and the
temperature set in the front air-conditioning control panel on the right.
The adjustable vent is in the glove box.
Turn adjustable vent 1 clockwise.
The glove box will be heated or
cooled.
Turn adjustable vent 1 counterclock-
wise.
Operating rear passenger compartment settings at the cockpit control
panel
Press button ™ ( page 214) on
the front control panel.
The display switches over to show the
rear passenger compartment settings. At the same time, the indicator
lamps in the air distribution buttons
come on according to the air distribution set for the rear compartment.
The glove box will neither be heated
nor cooled.
i
If you are transporting perishable
goods (e.g. groceries) in the glove
box, close the air vent while heating
the passenger compartment.
You can adjust all settings for the rear
passenger compartment at the cockpit
control panel.
Standard display
1 Adjustable vent
Approximately 5 seconds after the last
button was pressed, the current display
disappears and the standard display is
called back up.
or
Press button ™ again.
223
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment
Overview of Maybach 57
224
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
1 Thumbwheel for upper left air
vent
7
Fixed air vent
8
Center air vent, right, adjustable
2 Upper left air vent
9
Thumbwheel for center air vent
3 Upper right air vent
a
Automatic climate control panel
4 Thumbwheel for upper right air
vent
b
Thumbwheel for center air vent
5 Thumbwheel for lower right air
vent
c
Center air vent, left, adjustable
d
Lower left air vent
e
Thumbwheel for lower left air
vent
6 Lower right air vent
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate
control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or
frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep
sufficient distance between unprotected
parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control to
direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area
of unprotected skin.
225
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Overview of Maybach 62
226
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
1 Thumbwheel for upper left air
vent
7
Fixed air vent
8
Center air vent, right, adjustable
2 Upper left air vent
9
Thumbwheel for center air vent
3 Upper right air vent
a
Automatic climate control panel
4 Thumbwheel for upper right air
vent
b
Thumbwheel for center air vent
5 Thumbwheel for lower right air
vent
c
Center air vent, left, adjustable
d
Lower left air vent
e
Thumbwheel for lower left air
vent
6 Lower right air vent
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate
control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or
frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep
sufficient distance between unprotected
parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls to
direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area
of unprotected skin.
227
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
1 Air volume, left (manual)
7 Air distribution, right (manual)
2 Temperature control, left
8 AC cooling on/off
3 Display
9 Residual heat and ventilation/
Automatic climate control on/off
button
4 Temperature control, right
5 Air volume, right (manual)
6 Air distribution, right (automatic)
Automatic climate control panel, rear
228
a Air distribution, left (manual)
b Air distribution, left (automatic)
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Activating the climate control system
Activating
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press button M or U.
Deactivating
It is possible to completely deactivate the
automatic climate control system.
Press button M.
!
The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off.
Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function
can be switched off, if necessary.
i
The automatic climate control system
can also be switched on and off separately on each side of the passenger
compartment, as required.
Activating
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press one button U ( page 228).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
Use temperature controls 2 for the
left side or 4 for the right side to
separately adjust the air temperature
on each side of the passenger compartment.
The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
Press one button U.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off.
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 2 for the left
side or 4 for the right side to separately
adjust the air temperature on each side
of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C).
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
229
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Increasing
Push top of temperature control 2
and/or 4 ( page 228) until the dis-
play shows the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.
Decreasing
Push bottom of temperature
control 2 and/or 4 ( page 228) un-
til the display shows the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.
230
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 7
and a ( page 228) to separately adjust
the air distribution on each side of the
passenger compartment. The following
symbols are located on the controls:
Symbol Function
Ü
Directs air to roof vents or upper side, center and lower side
vents
Û
Directs air to roof vents or upper side, footwell, center and
lower side vents
Ú
Directs air to footwell, center
and lower side vents
a
Directs air to center and lower
side vents
Y
Directs air to the footwell air
vents
Press the desired air distribution
control 7 and/or a ( page 228).
The indicator lamp on button U
( page 228) goes out.
The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective
zone.
The selected air distribution is shown
in the display 3 ( page 228).
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air volume
Seven blower speeds are available.
Press to decrease or Q
( page 228) to increase air volume
to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on button U
( page 228) goes out.
The air volume is controlled manually
while the air distribution is controlled
automatically in the respective zone.
The selected blower speed is shown
in the display 3 ( page 228).
Air conditioning
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from
fogging up.
i
Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in
the vehicle will then no longer be cooled
or dehumidified.
Press button r ( page 228).
The indicator lamp on the
button r comes on.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You
can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
Press button r again
( page 228).
The indicator lamp on the
button r goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
231
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
i
Deactivating
If button r on the automatic climate control panel starts to flash, this
indicates that the air conditioning is
losing refrigerant. The compressor
has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again.
Press button T ( page 228).
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Maybach
Studio.
when the ignition is switched on
after about 30 minutes
if the battery voltage drops
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the
interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.
Activating
Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it
from the starter switch.
Press button T ( page 228).
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
232
The indicator lamp on button T
goes out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
i
How long the system will provide
heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by
the operator. The blower will run at
speed setting 1 regardless of the air
distribution control setting.
Solar panel*
The solar cells convert natural light into
electrical energy. When the engine is
switched off, the energy generated automatically switches on the ventilation
fan. The constant air flow creates a cooler temperature for cars parked in the
sunlight.
The air flow depends on the intensity of
the solar radiation. The ventilation starts
2 minutes after switching off the engine.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the power
windows
The windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all of the
windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
Warning!
G
When closing the windows, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch
or, if switch was pressed past the resistance
point and released, by pressing the respective switch.
The door windows are equipped with the
express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a
circumstance where you pressed the switch
past the resistance point and released it to
close the window, the automatic reversal
function will stop the window and open it
slightly.
Power window switches on the driver’s door
1
2
3
4
5
Left front door window
Right front door window
Right rear door window
Left rear door window
Rear door windows override switch
( page 105)
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance
where you are closing the window by
pressing and holding the switch, by pressing and holding button ‹ on the
SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock
button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) on
an outside door handle, or by pressing and
holding button , or button e
on the climate control panel, the automatic reversal function will not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
i
You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, see
“Summer opening feature”
( page 235) and “Convenience closing feature” ( page 236).
Depending on current position, the
windows may also open or close
when the air recirculation
button , or the charcoal filter
button e ( page 214) is pressed
and held for 2 seconds.
233
Controls in detail
Power windows
i
Opening the windows
Operating the windows from the rear
is not possible if you activate the
override switch ( page 105).
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
i
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the windows can be operated
until you open the driver’s or passenger door
symbol k to resistance point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Vehicles with rear door window curtains* ( page 309):
When opening a rear door window
with the rear door window curtain
not completely opened, the curtain
will open first.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol k past the resistance point
and release.
The corresponding window opens
completely.
Closing the windows
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol j to resistance point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
for at least 5 minutes
i
234
Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
Warning!
G
If you press and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some
obstruction including but not limited to
arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic
reversal will not operate.
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol j past the point of resistance and release.
The corresponding window closes
completely.
Warning!
G
Driver’s door only: If within 5 seconds you
again press the switch past the resistance
point and release, the automatic reversal
will not function.
Controls in detail
Power windows
!
If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing
procedure, the window will stop and
open slightly.
Remove the obstruction, press the respective power window switch at the
symbol j again past the resistance
point and release.
If the window still does not close
when there is no obstruction, press
and hold the respective power window switch at the symbol j.
The window will then close without
the obstruction sensor function.
Stopping the power windows during Express-operation
Synchronizing the power windows
The windows must be synchronized
after the consumer battery has been
disconnected
if the windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close)
Summer opening feature
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously
opening the windows
opening the tilt/sliding sunroof
Each window must be synchronized.
turning on the seat ventilation* for
the driver’s seat
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
i
Press and hold the power window
The seat ventilation* for the driver’s
seat is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer
opening feature.
switches at the symbol j until the
windows are completely closed.
Keep pressing the switches for ap-
proximately 1 second.
The windows are synchronized.
Briefly press the respective power
window switch again.
235
Controls in detail
Power windows
Convenience closing feature
When you lock the vehicle, you can close
the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof simultaneously.
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at
the driver’s outside door handle.
The SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** must be in close proximity to the driver’s door handle.
Press and hold button Πuntil the
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof have
reached the desired position.
Release button Πto interrupt pro-
cedure.
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at
the driver’s outside door handle
( page 236). The SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** must
be in close proximity to the driver’s
door handle.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are
completely closed.
Release button ‹ to interrupt pro-
cedure.
the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
are completely closed.
side door handle to interrupt procedure.
Release button ‹ to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
Release the lock button on the outside
door handle ( page 86) to stop the
closing procedure.
Pull on the outside door handle and
hold firmly. The windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof will open for as long as
the outside door handle is held but the
door not opened.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle ( page 86) until
G
When closing the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof, be sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
Press and hold button ‹ until the
Release the lock button on the out-
236
Warning!
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the power tilt/
sliding sunroof (Maybach 57)
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and
closed electrically. The switch for the tilt/
sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel.
Warning!
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
5 Screen
With the sunroof closed or tilted open,
screen 5 can be slid into the roof opening to help provide shade. When sliding
the sunroof open, the screen will also retract.
Sunroof switch
1
2
3
4
Push back to slide sunroof open
Push forward to slide sunroof closed
Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
Push up to raise sunroof at rear
G
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted
by releasing the switch or, if the switch was
moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of
glass. In the event of an accident, the glass
may shatter. This may result in an opening
in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them
properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing
their seat belts properly as entire body
parts or portions of them may protrude
from the passenger compartment.
237
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if
there is snow or ice on the roof, as
this could result in malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be
opened or closed manually should an
electrical malfunction occur
( page 454).
i
You can also open or close the tilt/
sliding sunroof using the SmartKey,
see “Summer opening feature”
( page 235) and “Convenience closing feature” ( page 236).
To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/
sliding sunroof, move the switch to
the resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4.
Depending on current position, the
tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or
close when the air recirculation
button , or the charcoal filter button e ( page 214) is pressed and
held for 2 seconds.
Release the sunroof switch when the
i
To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the tilt/sliding sunroof can
be operated
until you open the driver’s or passenger door
for up to approximately 5 minutes
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
238
Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding
sunroof
sliding sunroof, move the switch past
the resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4 and release.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely.
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
Move the switch in any direction.
i
If the movement of the tilt/sliding
sunroof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the sunroof will stop and
reopen slightly.
Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding
sunroof (Maybach 57)
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
Remove the respective fuse from the
fuse box ( page 482).
after the consumer battery has been
disconnected
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
closed manually
a malfunction
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse
box.
Move and hold the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 4 until the tilt/
sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
Keep holding the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 4 for approximately 1 second.
Check the Express-open feature
( page 238).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.
239
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62)
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and
closed electrically.
You can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof
from the cockpit or from the rear passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted
by releasing the switch or, if the switch was
moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of
glass. In the event of an accident, the glass
may shatter. This may result in an opening
in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them
properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing
240
their seat belts properly as entire body
parts or portions of them may protrude
from the passenger compartment.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning!
G
When closing the screen, make sure no one
can be caught and/or injured.
In case of danger, release the switch and, if
necessary, push the switch in direction
“open”.
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if
there is snow or ice on the roof, as
this could result in malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be
opened or closed manually should an
electrical malfunction occur
( page 454).
i
You can also open or close the tilt/
sliding sunroof using the SmartKey,
see “Summer opening feature”
( page 235) and “Convenience closing feature” ( page 236).
Depending on current position, the
tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or
close when the air recirculation
button , or the charcoal filter button e ( page 214) is pressed and
held for two seconds.
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
i
Operating from the cockpit
i
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the tilt/sliding sunroof can
be operated
The switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof is
on the overhead control panel.
If the screen is closed, the screen
opens first when you push the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 1.
until you open the driver’s or passenger door
for up to approximately 5 minutes
Push the sunroof switch again in direction of arrow 1 to open the tilt/
sliding sunroof.
The screen only operates with the tilt/
sliding sunroof closed.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Opening and closing the screen
To open or close the screen, move the
Sunroof switch, front
1 Push back to slide screen or sunroof
open
2 Push forward to slide screen or sunroof closed
3 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
4 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
sunroof switch to the resistance point
in the required direction of arrow 1
or 2.
Release the sunroof switch when the
screen has reached the desired position.
241
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-operation
Operating from the rear passenger compartment
Open the screen if it is closed.
Move the switch in any direction.
The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest.
To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/
sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch to resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4.
Release the sunroof switch when the
i
If the movement of the tilt/sliding
sunroof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof
will stop and reopen slightly.
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding
sunroof
Open the screen if it is closed.
To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/
sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch past the resistance point in the
required direction of arrows 1 to 4
and release.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely.
242
Sunroof switches, rear
(The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change)
1
2
3
4
Press to lower sunroof at rear
Press to slide screen or sunroof closed
Press to slide screen or sunroof open
Switch for screen and sliding portion
of roof
5 Press to raise sunroof at rear
6 Switch for tilt portion of roof
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
The switches are in the storage compartment in the rear center armrest.
i
If the screen is closed, the screen will
open first when you press sunroof
switch 4 at 3.
Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof
Open the screen if it is closed.
To open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
Press sunroof switch 4 again at 3 to
open the tilt/sliding sunroof.
roof, press sunroof switch 4 to the
resistance point at 3 or 2.
The screen only operates with the tilt/
sliding sunroof closed.
Release sunroof switch 4 when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Opening and closing the screen
Sunroof switches, rear (vehicles with rear
center seat*)
(The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change)
1
2
3
4
Press to lower sunroof at rear
Press to slide screen or sunroof closed
Press to slide screen or sunroof open
Switch for screen and sliding portion
of roof
5 Press to raise sunroof at rear
6 Switch for tilt portion of roof
To open or close the screen, press
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding
sunroof
sunroof switch 4 at 3 or 2.
Open the screen if it is closed.
Release the sunroof switch when the
screen has reached the desired position.
To open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen
roof, press sunroof switch 4 past the
resistance point at 3 or 2 and release.
The rear tilt/sliding sunroof opens or
closes completely.
To open or close the screen, press
sunroof switch 4 past the resistance
point at 3 or 2 and release.
The screen opens or closes complete-
ly.
243
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-operation
To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun-
roof, press sunroof switch 6 past the
resistance point at 1 or 5 and release.
Press sunroof switch 4 again.
i
If the movement of the tilt/sliding
sunroof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof
will stop and reopen slightly.
Raising and lowering the power tilt/sliding sunroof
To stop the procedure, press the
switch again.
Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding
sunroof (Maybach 62)
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
the rear, lower and close it.
Move and hold the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 4 ( page 241) or
press sunroof switch 6 at 5
( page 242) until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear.
Keep pressing the respective switch
Check the Express-open feature
( page 242).
a malfunction
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
244
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is raised at
the tilt/sliding sunroof has been operated manually
Open the screen if it is closed.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Release sunroof switch 6 when the
Fully raising and lowering the power tilt/
sliding sunroof
box.
after the consumer battery has been
disconnected
roof, press sunroof switch 6 to the
resistance point at 1 or 5.
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse
Open the screen if it is closed.
To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun-
Remove the respective fuse from the
fuse box ( page 482).
for approximately 1 second.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.
Controls in detail
Electrotransparent roof*
Electrotransparent roof*
Operating the electrotransparent
roof
You can operate the electrotransparent
roof from the cockpit or from the rear
passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When closing the screen, make sure no one
can be caught and/or injured.
In case of danger, release the switch and, if
necessary, push the switch in direction
“open”.
The electrotransparent roof is made out of
glass. In the event of an accident, the glass
may shatter. This may result in an opening
in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them
properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing
their seat belts properly as entire body
parts or portions of them may protrude
from the passenger compartment.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Operating from the cockpit
The switch for the electrotransparent
roof is on the overhead control unit.
i
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the electrotransparent roof
can be operated
until you open the driver’s or passenger door
for up to approximately 5 minutes
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Electrotransparent roof switches, front
1 Push back to slide screen closed
2 Push forward to slide screen open
3 Pull down to make the electrotransparent roof opaque/switch off roof
lighting
4 Push up to make the electrotransparent roof transparent/switch on roof
lighting
245
Controls in detail
Electrotransparent roof*
Opening the screen
Slide the switch to the resistance
point in direction of arrow 2.
Release the switch when the screen
has reached the desired position.
Stopping the screen during
Express-operation
Operating from the rear passenger compartment
Move the switch in any direction.
The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest.
Making the electrotransparent roof
transparent
Closing the screen
The screen must be completely open.
Move the switch to the resistance
Push the switch in direction of
point in direction of arrow 1.
Release the switch when the screen
has reached the desired position.
arrow 4.
Making the electrotransparent roof
opaque
Fully opening the screen (Express-open)
The screen must be completely open.
Move the switch past the resistance
Pull the switch in direction of
point in direction of arrow 2 and release.
The screen opens completely.
arrow 3.
Switching on roof lighting
The screen must be completely closed.
Fully closing the screen (Express-close)
Move the switch past the resistance
point in direction of arrow 1 and release.
The electrotransparent roof turns
opaque and the screen closes completely.
246
Press the switch in direction of
arrow 4.
Switching off roof lighting
Pull the switch in direction of
arrow 3.
Electrotransparent roof switches, rear
(The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press to make roof opaque
Press to slide screen closed
Press to slide screen open
Switch for screen
Press to make roof transparent
Switch for electrotransparent roof
Controls in detail
Electrotransparent roof*
Opening and closing the screen
To open or close the screen, press
switch 4 to the resistance point at 3
or 2.
Release the switch when the screen
has reached the desired position.
Electrotransparent roof switches, rear (vehicles with rear center seat*)
(The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press to make roof opaque
Press to slide screen closed
Press to slide screen open
Switch for screen
Press to make roof transparent
Switch for electrotransparent roof
Making the electrotransparent roof
transparent
Press switch 6 at 5.
The screen opens automatically and
the electrotransparent roof turns
transparent.
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen
Making the electrotransparent roof
opaque
To open or close the screen, press
If the screen is closed, open it com-
switch 4 past the resistance point
at 3 or 2 and release.
The screen opens or closes
completely.
pletely.
Press switch 6 at 1.
The electrotransparent roof turns
opaque.
Stopping the screen during
Express-operation
Press switch 4 again.
247
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are
described on the following pages:
Cruise control and Distronic**, with
which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed.
Cruise control
Cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
Airmatic DC adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically
and controls the vehicle level.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Vehicle level control, with which you
can change the vehicle level.
The cruise control function is operated
by means of the cruise control lever.
Parktronic and Parking Assist System
(PAS), which serves as a parking assistant.
For information on the BAS, ABS, ESP®
and electro-hydraulic brake, see “Driving
safety systems” ( page 107).
Warning!
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable
to travel at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow
safe driving at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel
spin and loss of control.
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
248
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Cruise control lever
Setting current speed
Canceling cruise control
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.
Accelerate or decelerate to the de-
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
sired speed.
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
Step on the brake pedal.
direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2.
The current speed is set.
Remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
1
2
3
4
Sets current or higher speed
Sets current or lower speed
Cancels cruise control
Resume at last set speed
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected
speed to the vehicle maximum speed are
illuminated.
i
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain
the set speed. Once the grade eases,
the set speed will be resumed.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
or
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
!
Moving the gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving, except to
coast when the vehicle is in danger of
skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
i
The last stored speed is canceled
when you turn off the engine.
249
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
i
Lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 ( page 249) and
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will
automatically downshift if the engine’s braking power does not slow
the vehicle sufficiently.
hold it until the desired speed is
reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal
does not deactivate cruise control.
After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control resumes the last
speed set.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 ( page 249).
Slower
Setting a lower speed
Depress the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 ( page 249) and
hold it until the desired speed is
reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
250
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2 ( page 249).
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
G
The speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to
preset speed could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 ( page 249).
The cruise control resumes the last set
speed.
Remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal.
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected
speed to the vehicle maximum speed are
illuminated.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic**
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control during travel on expressways and
other major roads.
If the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly
ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle
at a preset distance.
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the
same way as cruise control
( page 248).
Warning!
G
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It
does not react to stationary objects, nor
does it recognize or predict the curvature
and lane layout or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the vehicle’s braking
power.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to road, traffic and weather
conditions and to provide the steering,
braking and other driving inputs necessary
to retain control of the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective
and usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it is not intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The
responsibility for the vehicle speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead, including
most importantly brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests
with the driver.
Distronic cannot take street and traffic
conditions into account.
Warning!
G
Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to
this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
251
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to
this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Warning!
G
Distronic cannot take street and traffic
conditions into account. Only use Distronic
if the road, weather and traffic conditions
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.
252
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off Distronic or do not
turn it on if:
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
roads are slippery or covered with
snow or ice. The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating, and
the vehicle could skid
the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain or fog. The distance control could be impaired
Always pay attention to traffic conditions
even while Distronic is switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize
dangerous situations until it is too late and
could cause an accident resulting in personal or fatal injury to you or others.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless
of whether or not Distronic is activated.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
steady speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle
in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic will also not respond to oncoming
vehicles.
Switch off Distronic:
when changing from the left to the
right lane if vehicles are moving more
slowly in the left lane
when entering a turn lane or highway
off ramp
in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue
to maintain the set speed unless deactivated. Distronic is designed and intended only
to maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it.
Warning!
Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial
G
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
Set speed
If Distronic is activated, one or two segments come on around the set speed.
i
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from
the speed setting on the Distronic system.
253
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The intermittent warning sound ceases and the red distance warning
lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is
again established.
Segments
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the segments from the speed of
the vehicle ahead to the set speed come
on.
If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision
the distance warning lamp l in
the instrument cluster comes on red
an intermittent warning sounds
Immediately brake the vehicle to
avoid a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the following warning note.
254
Warning!
G
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic
system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
maintain the preset following distance,
which creates a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. The warning sound
is intended as a final caution that you have
not interceded with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the
warning signal to intercede with your own
braking, as that will result in potentially
dangerous emergency braking which will
not always result in an impact being avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds
to about 20% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the speed. The brake pedal is automatically applied as this happens which results in
the brake pedal moving.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
including the area under the brake pedal.
Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with
the braking ability of the Distronic system.
Do not place your foot under the brake
pedal – your foot could become caught.
Distronic menu in the control system
In the Distronic menu you can read the
current settings for Distronic. What appears in the display depends on whether
Distronic and the distance warning function are turned on or off.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following displays.
Distronic deactivated
If Distronic is deactivated, you can see
the standard display of Distronic in the
multifunction display.
Distronic activated
If you turn Distronic on, you will see the
set speed in the multifunction display for
about 5 seconds. If Distronic is activated,
you then see the following display in the
multifunction display.
1 Distronic activated
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning function
255
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Cruise control lever
Activating Distronic
Setting the current speed
The Distronic system is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
You can activate Distronic when
Accelerate or decelerate to the de-
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.
you are driving above 25 mph
(40 km/h)
®
the ESP is activated ( page 111)
i
The maximum speed you can set is
110 mph (180 km/h).
If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever you will
see the message --- in the multifunction display.
In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic:
1
2
3
4
Sets current or higher speed
Sets current or lower speed
Deactivates Distronic
Resumes at last set speed
256
sired speed.
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2.
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.
Remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal.
i
If you do not take your foot off of the
accelerator completely, the following
message will appear in the multifunction display:
up to 2 minutes after starting the engine
DISTRONIC
OVERRIDE
when you brake
if you have set the parking brake
if the gear selector lever is in
position P, R or N
Distronic will not work to maintain
the distance to slower moving vehicles in front of you. Your vehicle
speed will then be determined only
by the accelerator pedal position.
if the ESP® is switched off
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
Setting a lower speed
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 ( page 256) to
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2 ( page 256) to
Setting to last stored speed (“Resume”
function)
G
increase vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
decrease vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
Warning!
The new speed is set.
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and one or two
segments around the stored speed
come on in the speedometer
( page 253).
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and one or two
segments around the stored speed
come on in the speedometer
( page 253).
The speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to
preset speed could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
i
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal
does not deactivate Distronic. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
the cruise control resumes the last
speed set.
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the brakes will be applied to support deceleration.
In addition, the transmission will automatically downshift on long downhill grades.
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 ( page 256).
Distronic is set to the last stored
speed.
Remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 ( page 256).
257
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating Distronic
Distronic deactivates automatically
when:
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You set the parking brake.
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 ( page 256).
You drive slower than 22 mph
(35 km/h).
or
The ESP® is active ( page 111) or you
deactivate the ESP®.
You move the transmission gear selector lever into position N.
You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time
setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time setting and the current
speed of your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set
distance will be shown in the multifunction display.
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:
Step on the brake pedal.
Distronic is deactivated. The last
speed set is stored into memory.
i
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds:
DISTRONIC OFF
The last stored speed is deleted when
you turn off the engine.
258
A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC
OFF message appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds.
Warning!
G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of approximately
22 mph (35 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the
brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed
further or bring it to a stop.
Warning!
G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion
to select the appropriate setting given
road conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred
driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following
distance.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The distance warning function on/off
button and thumbwheel for setting distance are located on the lower part of
the front center console.
Turn thumbwheel 3 in direction of
arrow 4.
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Turn thumbwheel 3 in direction of
arrow 5.
Distance warning function
1 Distance warning function on/off
button
2 Indicator lamp
3 Thumbwheel for setting distance
4 Increasing distance
5 Decreasing distance
Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a slower vehicle moving in the
vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists:
The distance warning lamp l in
the instrument cluster comes on.
An intermittent warning sounds.
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the vehicle ahead.
When pressing the brake pedal, the
warning sound stops. The warning sound
also stops when the distance to the vehi-
cle ahead is sufficient again without applying the brake pedal. In this case the
distance warning lamp l also extinguishes.
Warning!
G
If the distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
immediate attention on the part of the
driver is required.
As required by the traffic situation, apply
the brakes and navigate around a possible
obstacle. However, do not drive by relying
on the distance warning function, as this
will result in an emergency braking application. Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this
will not always enable you to avoid a collision.
i
Complex driving situations are not
always fully recognized by Distronic.
This could result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
259
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating
Press button 1 {.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display ( page 255).
Deactivating
Press button 1 {.
The indicator lamp 2 on the button
goes out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display.
Warning!
Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a
distance set by Distronic). This means that:
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes.
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is
required on the part of the driver. Be
prepared to brake in such situations. This
will deactivate the Distronic system.
G
Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.:
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
a disabled vehicle
an oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required
by steering or braking the vehicle.
260
Warning!
G
Distronic should not be used in snowy or
icy road conditions.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor (located behind the hood grille), especially at times
of snow and ice or heavy rain. In such a
case, Distronic will switch off, and the
message:
DISTRONIC
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
appears in the multifunction display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic
sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic system sensor” ( page 403).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i
Turns and bends
Offset driving
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may
detect one too soon. This may cause your
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
If the message:
DISTRONIC
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
disappears during driving and last
speed stored flashes for approximately 5 seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has
dissolved; Distronic is again operational.
261
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Lane changing
Narrow vehicles
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane changing vehicle.
Because of their narrow profiles, the vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane have not yet been detected by
Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead.
262
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)
Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height
for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of
three components:
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
Stiffness of spring
Vehicle level control
The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving
conditions. At the same time the suspension is set to either sporty or regular.
Damping and suspension are adjusted
automatically according to your driving
style and road conditions. In addition to
the automatic mode designed for your
convenience, you can adjust the suspension tuning yourself by selecting from
two other levels using the button on the
center console.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according
to:
Your driving style
Road surface conditions
Your choice of suspension style,
“Comfort”, “Sporty 1” or “Sporty 2”,
which you select using the damping
button.
263
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1 Damping button
2 Indicator lamp
3 Indicator lamp
Start the engine ( page 62).
Press damping button 1 until the de-
sired suspension style is set.
If both indicator lamps are out,
you have chosen the automatic
mode for soft damping. The message:
AIRMATIC DC
CONVENIENCE
for Comfort suspension tuning
appears in the multifunction display.
264
i
If one indicator lamp is on, the
control system supports a primarily dynamic style of driving. The
message:
The selected suspension style is stored
in memory, even after the SmartKey
is removed from the starter switch.
AIRMATIC DC
SPORTS 1
Vehicle level control
for Sporty 1 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display.
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its
ride height to
If both indicator lamps are on, the
system is set for a dynamic style of
driving. The message:
increase vehicle safety
reduce fuel consumption
AIRMATIC DC
SPORTS 2
for Sporty 2 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area,
and stay away from under the vehicle
when lowering the vehicle chassis.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can
be selected when the vehicle is stationary
(Maybach 57, Maybach 62):
Vehicle level
Indicator lamp Use for
when stationary
Ride height increase over Automatic lowering
normal
(depending on vehicle speed)
Normal
Lamp off
For driving on normal roads.
None
Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm)
Raised
Lamp on
For driving on rough roads or
with snow chains.
Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm)
Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm)
The normal level of the Maybach 57 S is
0.6 in (15 mm) lower than for other models. The data given in the following table
is based on the normal vehicle level of
the Maybach 57 S:
Vehicle level
Indicator lamp Use for
when stationary
Ride height increase over Automatic lowering
normal
(depending on vehicle speed)
Normal
Lamp off
For driving on normal roads.
None
None
Raised
Lamp on
For driving on rough roads or
with snow chains.
Approx. 1.8 in (45 mm)
Max. approx. 1.8 in (45 mm)
265
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The button is located on the lower part
of the front center console.
Press button 1 again to lower the
vehicle. The indicator lamp 2 is off.
The selected vehicle level setting remains
stored in memory even if the engine is
turned off and restarted except when
you
1 Vehicle level control button
2 Indicator lamp
Normal level (Maybach 57,
Maybach 62): At a speed exceeding
approximately 68 mph (110 km/h),
the ride height is reduced automatically ( page 265).
Raised level: At a speed exceeding approximately 75 mph (120 km/h), the
ride height is reduced automatically
( page 265).
With decreasing speed, the ride
height is again raised to the normal
level.
exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h)
or
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
maintain a speed of between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for
more than 5 minutes
The vehicle then lowers to normal level.
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
Start the engine.
i
Briefly press button 1 to change
These height adjustments are so small
that you may not notice any change.
from one level setting to the other.
The message:
AIRMATIC DC
VEHICLE RISING
appears for approximately
10 seconds in the multifunction display when changing from normal level to raised level. The indicator
lamp 2 is then on.
266
Select the raised level only when required by current driving conditions.
Otherwise
handling may be impaired
fuel consumption may increase
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system (Parking assist)
Warning!
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or
road curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
can be affected by dirty sensors, especially
at times of snow and ice, see “Cleaning the
Parktronic system sensors” ( page 403).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash,
or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the
system to send erratic indications, and
should be taken into consideration.
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in
the rear bumper.
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically
activated when you switch on the ignition, release the parking brake, and
placed the gear selector lever in
position D, R, or N. The Parktronic system
deactivates at speeds over approximately
11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the
Parktronic system turns on again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates
when you place the gear selector lever in
position P or depress the parking brake
pedal.
1 Sensors in the front bumper
Range of the sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
the sensors regularly, being careful not
to scratch or damage the sensors, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors”
( page 403).
267
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Front sensors
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
!
During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located
above or below the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs, painted posts,
or trailer hitches etc.). The Parktronic
system will not detect such objects at
close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of the Parktronic system.
268
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the warning lamps come on
and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance might no
longer be indicated by the system.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the
relative distance between the sensors
and an obstacle. The warning indicator
for the front area is located above the
center air vents in the dashboard. The
warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the rear roof lining
( pages 38-46).
In case you still cannot see the warning
indicator after lifting up the rear view
mirror:
Adjust the interior rear view mirror
by hand until you can see the warning indicator.
The interior rear view mirror returns to
its original position as soon as:
the gear selector lever is no longer in
position R
you exceed a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h)
Maybach 62 with partition*
You have an additional warning indicator for the rear area in the roof lining, in
front of the partition.
In order for you to see this warning indicator, the interior rear view mirror tilts
slightly upward if:
the partition and curtain are not
completely open
the gear selector lever is in position R
1 Left front area warning indicator
2 Right front area warning indicator
3 Readiness indicators
Each warning indicator is divided into
five yellow and two red segments for either side of the vehicle.
The Parktronic system is ready when the
green readiness indicators 3 are illuminated.
269
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators activated
The position of the gear selector lever
determines which warning indicators
will be activated.
Gear selector Warning indicator
lever position
D
Front area activated
R or N
Rear and front area activated
P
Neither activated
270
As your vehicle approaches an object,
one or more segments will come on, depending on the distance between your
vehicle and the object. When the second
red segment comes on, you have reached
the minimum distance.
Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red
segment comes on and a constant
acoustic warning lasting a maximum
of 2 seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is
placed in position P or the parking
brake is activated.
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red
segment comes on and a constant
acoustic warning lasting a maximum
of 2 seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is
placed in position D, P, or the parking
brake is activated.
Switching the Parktronic system on/off
The Parktronic system can be switched
off manually.
The Parktronic button is located on the
lower part of the front center console.
1 Parktronic on/off
2 Indicator lamp
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching off the Parktronic system
Parktronic malfunction
Press button 1.
If only the red distance segments illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds,
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic
switch comes on.
If only the red segments of the Parktronic warning indicator go out and no warning sounds, then the sensors of the
Parktronic system are dirty or malfunctioning. Malfunction may also be caused
by interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system will
switch itself off after 20 seconds.
Have the Parktronic system checked
Switch off the ignition ( page 62).
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Switching on the Parktronic system
Press button 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i
The Parktronic system is automatically switched on when the ignition is
switched on ( page 62).
by an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
Clean Parktronic system sensors
( page 403).
Switch on the ignition.
or
Check Parktronic operation at anoth-
er location to rule out interference
from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
271
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parking Assist System (PAS)
The Parking Assist System (PAS) is an optical parking aid. It shows you the area
behind the vehicle on the COMAND
display 1.
The camera is in the license plate recess
next to the handle for the trunk lid.
In addition, the PAS contains guide lines
to help you with reverse parking
(back-in parking) and parallel parking.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed
as a reverse-mirror image similar to the
view in a rear view mirror.
1 Camera
For cleaning and care of the camera lens,
see “Cleaning of the Parking Assist System (PAS) camera lens” ( page 404).
1 COMAND display
2 To switch COMAND on/off
3 To switch between parallel parking/
reverse parking
272
Controls in detail
Driving systems
View through the camera
The 20 in (50 cm) 1, 40 in (100 cm) 2
and 107 in (270 cm) 3 guide lines correspond to the respective distance on the
ground to the rear end of the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Please note that objects which do not
touch the ground, such as the bumper of a
vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch,
or the back of a truck, may appear to be
further away than they actually are. In this
case, you should not use the guide lines to
judge distance. The use of the guide lines
to judge distance increases the risk of impacting the objects.
Warning!
1
2
3
4
20 in (50 cm) guide line
40 in (100 cm) guide line
107 in (270 cm) guide line
Guide line for vehicle width
G
The PAS is a supplement system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for
extreme care. The responsibility during
parking and other driving maneuvers always rests with the driver.
The PAS may show obstacles with a distorted perspective, incorrectly or not at all.
Special attention must be paid to objects
outside of the camera’s field of view such
as those located very close to or below the
rear bumper, or above the recessed grip of
the trunk lid. Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
The PAS does not warn you about impending collisions with objects. The driver is always responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings while parking or maneuvering the vehicle. This applies not only to
the area behind the vehicle, but also to the
area in front of and to the sides of the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in injury
to persons and/or damage to the vehicle or
other property. We also recommend that
the driver use the Parktronic system when
parking or maneuvering the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them.
273
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
PAS may not function if:
the camera lens is dirty or covered see
“Cleaning of the Parking Assist System
(PAS) camera lens” ( page 404)
the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this case, have the position and setting
of the camera checked by a qualified
technician. Contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
the trunk lid is not completely closed
it is raining or snowing heavily, or if
there is thick fog
in a very dark area
the camera is exposed to very strong
white light (white stripes may appear
on the COMAND display)
the surrounding area is lit with fluorescent light (the COMAND display can
flicker)
Do not use the PAS if the roads are icy, slippery or covered with snow. The vehicle
could slip causing the actual vehicle position to deviate from the one shown on the
COMAND display. This may cause injury to
you or others, or damage the vehicle or objects.
there is a sudden change in temperature, for example when you drive out
of the cold into a heated garage in
winter (lens condensation)
Mounting tires/rims of other specification
than the original equipment tires/rims may
impair the function of the PAS. Contact an
authorized Maybach Studio.
outside temperatures are very high
(lens condensation)
Warning!
G
Use of PAS can be dangerous if you are
color-blind or have impaired color vision.
Only use PAS if you can see and distinguish
all colored guide lines shown by PAS on
the COMAND display.
274
Switching on PAS
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Switch on the COMAND (please refer
to the separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating
instructions).
Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
The COMAND display will show the
area behind the vehicle with guide
lines to help you reverse into a parking place.
i
If you activate a different function on
the driver’s COMAND controls while
reverse parking or parallel parking,
the image from the back-up camera is
interrupted.
To reactivate the camera, take the vehicle out of reverse gear and then reengage reverse gear again.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Reverse parking (back-in parking)
Warning!
G
Please note that objects which do not
touch the ground, such as the bumper of a
vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch,
or the back of a truck, may appear to be
further away than they actually are. In this
case, you should not use the guide lines to
judge distance as the use of the guide lines
to judge distance increases the risk of impacting the objects.
1
2
3
4
First yellow guide line
Red guide line
Second yellow guide line
Guide line for vehicle width
This function helps you when you are reversing in a straight line or backing in at
any angle. The guide line for vehicle
width 4 shows the width necessary for
the vehicle.
Even when the object you approach is directly on the ground (and nothing on the
object extends above the ground beyond
the object’s contours directly touching the
ground) and no objects that do not touch
the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or
the back of a truck are in the path, do not
approach the object on the ground any
closer than red guide line 2.
1 Guide line for straight driving
2 Guide line for cornering
The guide line for straight driving 1
shows you the space necessary for your
vehicle.
When you turn the steering wheel, the
room required by the vehicle for reversing with the corresponding wheel angle
is shown with yellow guide lines 2.
275
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Backing in straight
Switch on the COMAND.
Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
You will see the guide line for reverse
parking on the COMAND display.
Back in straight carefully.
The desired parking space is wide
enough if nothing protrudes into or
is within the guide lines.
Backing in at any angle
Switch on the COMAND.
Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
You will see the guide line for reverse
parking on the COMAND display.
276
Turn steering wheel so that the guide
lines for cornering are pointing towards the desired parking space.
The parking space is wide enough if
nothing protrudes into the guide
lines.
Back in carefully.
Parallel parking
This function assists you when you wish
to park in a row, e.g. in a parking place
parallel to the road.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location
at a distance of approximately
3 feet (1 meter) parallel to the vehicle that is in front of the desired
parking space.
in such a way that the front of the
parked vehicle is parallel to your
rear wheel.
When the green guide line for
straight driving lies parallel inside the
desired parking space, straighten the
steering wheel for straight driving.
Back in enough to leave sufficient
free space around the vehicle.
Switch on the COMAND.
Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
If the respective vertical guide line 2 is
not yet located at the end of the parked
vehicle and you are already turning into
the parking space, you could collide with
the parked vehicle. Stop the parking procedure immediately. Pull out of the parking space and start the parking procedure
over again.
1 Parallel parking/back-in parking selector button
Press parallel parking button 1 on
front center console.
i
If you press the parallel parking/backin parking selector button 1 again,
you have selected the reverse parking
assistance function once more
( page 275).
2 Vertical guide line
Back up carefully parallel to parked
car until the respective vertical guide
line 2 is at the end of the parked vehicle next to you.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
3
4
5
6
Tire reference point
Extension guide line
Vehicle contour guide lines
Exterior boundary line
277
Controls in detail
Driving systems
With the vehicle at a standstill, turn
steering wheel in direction of parking
until extension guide line 4 intersects the reference point for the rear
tire of the vehicle parked next to
you 3.
or
If there is no vehicle next to you to
use as a reference, turn steering
wheel until exterior boundary line 6
intersects the curb or some other
marking with which you would like
to parallel park.
i
If there is an obstacle within vehicle
contour guide lines 5 (e.g. part of
the vehicle parked behind you or a
part of the curb), the parking space is
too small for your vehicle.
278
i
If you turn the steering wheel too far,
the following appears in the
COMAND display: Guidance by PAS
not possible. Steering wheel turned
too far. Please turn back. Turn the
steering wheel back until the
COMAND display clears and extension guide line 4 intersects the reference point for the rear tire of the
vehicle parked next to you 3.
If you back up using the wrong wheel
angle, the following appears in the
COMAND display: Guidance by PAS no
longer possible. Pull out of the parking space and start the parking procedure over again.
7 Bent guide line
Back up with the set wheel angle.
The guide lines in the COMAND display disappear. After a short distance,
bent guide line 7 appears.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Back up using the set wheel angle un-
i
til guide line 8 for straight driving is
parallel to the edge of the parking
space, e.g. the curb.
If you turn the steering wheel while
backing up, the following appears in
the COMAND display: Guidance by
PAS no longer possible. The
calculated course is no longer being
followed. Pull out of the parking
space and start the parking procedure over again.
Back up until bent guide line 7 inter-
sects the edge of the parking space,
e.g. the curb.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
Now straighten out steering wheel
and back up until you still have just
enough room behind the vehicle.
While doing so, observe the
Parktronic warning indicators
( page 269).
8 Guide line for straight driving
9 Guide line for cornering
With the vehicle at a standstill, turn
steering wheel as far as it will go in
the opposite direction.
The guide lines for straight driving 8
and cornering 9 appear in the
COMAND display.
279
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down hooks
Six hooks are located in the trunk.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even
load on all hooks with rope of sufficient
strength to hold down the cargo.
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle
occupants and luggage/cargo should not
exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity
weight indicated on the corresponding
placard located on the driver’s door
B-pillar ( page 368).
Warning!
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or
cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile
luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the rearwindow shelf.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter
vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
280
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Vanity mirror in the rear
Vanity mirrors
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Warning!
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
!
Close the vanity mirror cover (if open)
before you disengage the sun visor
from the mounting and pivot it to the
side ( page 210).
1 Mirror lamp
2 Mirror cover
To use mirror, lift up cover 2.
Mirror lamp 1 comes on.
i
If you disengage the sun visor from
mounting, mirror lamp 1 will switch
off.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
3 Vanity mirror
4 Chrome label
Opening the vanity mirror
Press chrome label 4.
Vanity mirror 3 folds down and the
mirror lamp comes on.
Adjusting the vanity mirror
Slide the mirror to the left or to the
right.
Images in the mirror appear in normal size or larger, depending on the
position of the mirror.
Closing the vanity mirror
Push vanity mirror 3 up until it en-
gages in place.
281
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ventilation grille with upper storage
box
Storage compartments
Warning!
G
Closing the upper storage box
Fold the cover down until it engages
in the lock.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident.
282
Press the chrome label.
The storage box opens.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put
luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the seat backs.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will
help to prevent stored objects from being
thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during
Opening the upper storage box
1 Upper storage box
Controls in detail
Useful features
Glove box
i
Unlocking the glove box separately
An AUX socket is located in the glove
box. Portable audio devices can be
plugged in here.
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey ( page 452).
Insert the mechanical key into the
Opening
glove box lock and turn it to
unlocked position 3.
Press button 1.
You can now open the glove box.
The glove box lid 2 swings down.
Storage compartment in the glove box
Closing
1
2
3
4
Glove box lid release
Glove box lid
Unlocked position
Locked position
Push lid 2 up to close.
A storage compartment for pens, a flashlight and a coin holder is located in the
cover of the glove box.
Locking the glove box separately
Opening
i
You can lock the glove box separately,
e.g. when the vehicle is in the shop for
service.
The glove box can be heated or
cooled.
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey ( page 452).
Closing
Insert the mechanical key into the
Lightly push the cover plate up until
The glove box can get very warm due
to its confined space ( page 223).
When storing heat-sensitive objects
in the glove box, close the air vent
while heating the passenger compartment.
glove box lock and turn it to locked
position 4.
Lightly touch cover plate.
The cover opens automatically.
it engages in lock.
i
The separate locking status of the
glove box can only be canceled by
means of the mechanical key.
283
Controls in detail
Useful features
Compartment for the front telephone
Warning!
Closing
Press button 1 to close.
G
!
To prevent any damage, the telephone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone
compartment.
Always keep the compartment for the
front telephone closed while driving. The
protruding telephone could otherwise
cause injury to you and others during
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident.
i
1 Compartment lid release button
2 Compartment for telephone
Opening
Press release button 1.
The compartment lid opens downward. The telephone handset swings
out.
284
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡
( page 330) are located in the compartment for the front telephone.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments in the front
doors
Warning!
G
Always keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to
catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt.
Opening the storage compartment
Lift the lid 1 up.
Storage compartments in the rear doors
(Maybach 57)
Closing the storage compartment
Press the lid 1 down.
Opening the storage compartment
Press button 2.
The storage compartment 3 opens.
Closing the storage compartment
Push the cover plate 3 up until it en-
gages in the lock.
1 Headphones storage compartment
2 Storage compartment (for ashtray in
vehicles with a rear center seat*)
Opening the storage compartment
Lift the lid 1 or 2 up.
Closing the storage compartment
1 Storage compartment
2 Opening button
3 Storage compartment with storage
space for change and CDs
Press the lid 1 or 2 down.
285
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments in the rear doors
(Maybach 62)
Opening the storage compartment
Lift the lid 1 or 2 up.
Storage compartment under the driver’s
seat
Closing the storage compartment
Press the lid 1 or 2 down.
Opening the storage compartment
Press button 3.
Storage compartment 4 opens.
Closing the storage compartment
1
2
3
4
Headphones storage compartment
Storage compartment
Opening button
Storage compartment (for ashtray in
vehicles with a rear center seat*)
Push the cover plate 4 up until it en-
gages in the lock.
1 Tabs
Opening the storage compartment
Press tabs 1 together.
Fold the cover forward.
Closing the storage compartment
Close the cover until both tabs 1 of
lock engage.
286
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment and storage compartment/drawer between the front
seats (Maybach 62 with partition*)
Opening storage compartment
Press button 2 briefly.
The storage compartment 1 opens
upward.
Storage compartments in rear center
console
Opening/closing the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console
Closing storage compartment
Push storage compartment 1 down-
ward until it engages in the lock.
Opening storage compartment/drawer
Press button 4 briefly.
1 Storage compartment
2 Opening button for storage compartment
3 Storage compartment/drawer
4 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer
The storage compartment/drawer 3
opens.
Closing storage compartment/drawer
Push storage compartment/
drawer 3 until it engages in the lock.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer
2 Storage compartment/drawer
i
The remote control for the rear-cabin
audiovisual system (see the separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) is located in the storage compartment/
drawer.
287
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Maybach 62 with rear center seat*:
In the storage compartment/drawer
is the rear center console ( page 52).
Maybach 57:
To open, press button 1.
The storage compartment/drawer 2
opens.
To close, push storage compartment/
drawer 2 in until it engages in the
lock.
i
There is no storage compartment/
drawer in Maybach 57 with rear center seat* if your vehicle configuration
has the control panel for the rear
functions* on the lower rear enter
console.
Maybach 62:
To open, press button 1.
The storage compartment/drawer 2
opens slightly.
If necessary:
288
Close the champagne flute/bottle
holder ( page 296).
or
Opening/closing the upper storage compartment in rear center console
(only Maybach 62)
Close the folding table*
( page 302).
Press button 1 again.
The storage compartment/drawer 2
opens fully.
To close, push storage compartment/
drawer 2 in until it engages in the
lock.
Maybach 62 with partition*
1 Cover
2 Opening button for upper storage
compartment
To open, press button 2.
Cover 1 swings upward.
To close, press the cover 1 down-
ward.
Cover 1 engages automatically.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Multifunction compartment* on the
driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat
backrest
Closing the multifunction compartment
To close, press multifunction
compartment 1 until it engages.
Storage pocket (only Maybach 62)
Warning!
G
The storage pocket is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Maybach 62 without partition*
1 Cover
2 Opening button for upper storage
compartment
3 Opening button for upper storage
compartment
To open, press button 2 or 3.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in
the storage pocket.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
The storage pocket cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident.
1 Multifunction compartment
2 Button for opening multifunction
compartment
Cover 1 swings upward.
To close, press the cover 1 down-
ward.
Cover 1 engages automatically.
Opening the multifunction compartment
Press button 2.
Multifunction compartment 1 folds
out.
289
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage pockets for Maybach 62 without
partition*
Storage pockets for Maybach 62 with
partition*
Storage pockets are located on the left
and right side of the rear center console.
Storage pockets are located on the back
of the front seats.
Storage compartments between the rear
seats
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Storage pocket
290
1 Storage pocket
1 Upper storage compartment with insert for champagne flutes
2 Opening button for upper storage
compartment
3 DVD player compartment and AUX
sockets, headphone jacks
4 CD changer compartment
5 Middle storage compartment
6 Rear center armrest with compartment for telephone, storage compartment/refrigerator** underneath
7 Release catch
8 Ashtray/storage compartment*
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Always fold the rear center armrest 6
downward while the vehicle is in motion.
Without the armrest 6 folded down, the
rear center armrest could open the storage
compartment 5 in an accident or during
abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored
there then could be thrown around in the
vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage
and/or personal injury.
i
For more information on DVD player,
AUX sockets, headphone jacks and
CD changer, refer to the separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Opening the upper storage compartment 1
Press button 2.
The upper storage compartment
opens upward.
Opening storage compartments 3, 4,
5 and 8
Opening/closing the storage compartment under the rear center armrest
Press the chrome label on the cover.
To open, lift up armrest 6.
The compartment opens.
To close, press the armrest 6 down-
ward.
Closing storage compartments 3, 4, 5
and 8
Press the cover closed.
The cover engages automatically.
Opening/closing the storage compartment in the rear center armrest
To open, release catch 7 and swing
cover of the rear center armrest 6
upward.
To close, press the cover of the rear
center armrest 6 downward.
The cover engages automatically.
i
There is an additional storage compartment in front of the telephone
compartment.
291
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments in vehicles with a
rear center seat*
Opening/closing the telephone
compartment
If the third seat is not occupied, you can
also use the seat backrest as an armrest.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DVD player
CD changer
AUX sockets and headphone jacks
Storage compartment
Cover
Release catch
To open telephone compartment and
access control panel for respective
rear functions*
Press release catch 6 and swing
cover 5 upward 7.
i
For more information on DVD player,
AUX sockets, headphone jacks and
CD changer, refer to the separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Rear armrest
Pull the top of armrest 1 out and
fold it downward.
!
Do not sit on or lean your body
weight against the armrest when it is
folded down, as you could otherwise
damage it.
292
Example illustration from Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*)
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments in trunk
Opening the compartment
Turn handle 1 or 4 90°.
Umbrella
An umbrella is located in the trunk.
Swing the cover down.
Closing the compartment
Swing the cover up.
Turn handle 1 or 4 90°.
1 Handle
2 Compartment for navigation system
DVD drive
3 Storage compartment
4 Handle
1 Umbrella
2 Straps
Use straps 2 on the inside of the
trunk lid to store and secure
umbrella 1.
293
Controls in detail
Useful features
Floormats
Warning!
G
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that
the floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 1 and retainer
pins 2.
1 Eyelet
2 Retainer pin
i
Installing and removing for the front
seats:
To install or remove the floormat
more easily, move the driver’s seat or
front passenger seat as far to the rear
as possible ( page 66).
Installing and removing in the rear:
To install or remove the floormat
more easily, move the driver’s seat or
front passenger seat as far to the
front as possible ( page 66).
294
Before driving off, check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them
if necessary. A loose floormat could slip
and hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal movement.
Removing
Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2.
Remove the floormats.
Installing
Lay down the floormat.
Press the floormat eyelets 1 onto re-
tainer pins 2.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holders, cockpit
Cup holders
Warning!
The cover engages automatically.
G
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers
and do not fill containers to a height
where the contents, especially hot liquids,
could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Liquids spilled on
vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle
equipment may cause damage not covered
by the Maybach Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Press the cover closed.
Rear cup/bottle holders
1 Cup holder, left
2 Cup holder, right
Opening
Press the chrome label on the cover.
The compartment opens.
Press the chrome label of the desired
1 Rear cup holder
2 Release catch for champagne flute/
bottle holder
3 Release catch for cup holder
cup holder.
Opening
The cup holder slides out.
Press release catch on cup holder 3.
Closing
Remove cup from holder.
The cup holder slides out automatically.
Push the cup holder in until it engag-
es.
295
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing
Opening
Remove cup from holder.
Press the label of the desired cup
Take the cups out of the holder.
holder.
Press the holder back in until it en-
The cup holder slides out.
gages.
Cup holder (vehicles with a rear center
seat*)
Closing
Remove cup from holder.
Push the cup holder in until it engag-
es.
Champagne flute/bottle holder
Warning!
G
When not in use, keep the champagne
flute/bottle holder closed while the vehicle
is in motion.
Place only champagne flutes from the
Maybach Accessory range into the champagne flute holder. Only use those flutes
designed for use with the holder. Make
sure the champagne flutes are held in
place by the retaining clips whenever the
flutes are placed in the holder. This will reduce the risk of the flutes becoming loose
during vehicle maneuvers.
Place only bottles that fit fully within the
bottle holder to reduce the possibility of
the bottle becoming loose and being
thrown around in the vehicle interior during vehicle maneuvers.
1 Cup holder, right
2 Cup holder, left
296
Loose objects being thrown around in the
vehicle during vehicle maneuvers may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Always obey applicable state or province
laws regarding passengers consuming alcoholic beverages in the vehicle and/or carrying alcoholic beverages in the vehicle
interior.
Inserting champagne flutes
i
Use the champagne flutes from the
Maybach Accessory range. Only those
flutes are designed for use with the
holder.
Place the champagne flutes in the re-
tainers and press them down lightly.
The champagne flutes are held in
place by the retaining clips.
To remove the champagne flutes,
pull them upright carefully.
Closing
Opening
Take the champagne flutes/bottle
Press release catch on champagne
flute/bottle holder 2 ( page 295).
With the champagne flute/bottle
out of the holder.
holder open, remove the drip tray
from the transmission tunnel and
place it in the opening for the bottle.
The champagne flute/bottle holder
slides out automatically.
Take the drip tray out of the opening
Press the holder closed until it engages.
for the bottle and place it under the
opening on the carpet.
Magnets hold the drip tray in the correct position.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
297
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Rear compartment ashtray
Removing ashtray insert
Warning!
G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear
selector lever to position P. With gear selector lever in position P, turn off the engine.
Push sliding button 1 to the right.
1 Sliding button
2 Insert slides out
Opening ashtray
Tap lightly on the chrome label on
the cover.
The ashtray opens automatically.
The ashtray is disengaged and slides a
short way out 2.
1 Sliding button
2 Insert slides out
Remove insert from ashtray frame.
Opening ashtray
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
Tap lightly on the chrome label on
Install insert by pushing back into
frame until it engages again.
Close the ashtray.
the cover.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Removing ashtray insert
Push sliding button 1 to the right.
The ashtray is disengaged and slides a
short way out 2.
298
Controls in detail
Useful features
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
Removing ashtray insert
Install insert by pushing back into
Lift lid 1 up.
frame until it engages again.
Close the ashtray.
Rear compartment ashtray
(vehicles with a rear center seat*)
Lift ashtray lid 3.
Press sliding button 2 forward.
Insert 4 slides out a short distance.
Remove insert 4 from ashtray frame.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
Install insert 4 by pushing back into
frame until it engages again.
Close the ashtray.
1
2
3
4
Lid
Sliding button
Ashtray lid
Insert
Cigarette lighters
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides
of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold
the knob only.
To avoid possible injury to children sitting
in the rear seat, deactivate the operation
of the rear door windows ( page 105).
Deactivation of the rear windows also deactivates the rear compartment lighter.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Opening ashtray
Lift lid 1 up.
Lift ashtray lid 3.
299
Controls in detail
Useful features
!
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of 85 W)
designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in
mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter socket (for example extensive connecting and
disconnecting, or using plugs that do
not fit properly) can damage the
lighter socket. With the socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be
able to be placed in the heating
(pushed-in) position, or the lighter
may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette
lighter socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories
designed for use with a standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V
power outlets ( page 305) in your
vehicle whenever possible.
300
1 Center console lighter
1 Rear compartment lighter
(vehicles with a rear center seat*)
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
i
1 Rear compartment lighter
Make sure the override switch is not
activated ( page 105). The rear
lighter will not function if the override switch is activated.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Non-smokers package*
Storage compartment in rear center console
Storage compartment in front center
console
1 Storage compartment
2 Chrome label
1 Storage compartment
2 Chrome label
Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the
cover.
Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the
cover.
Storage compartment 1 opens.
Storage compartment 1 opens.
301
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the folding table
Folding table*
(standard on Maybach 62;
optional on Maybach 57)
Warning!
G
Keep the folding table closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, you could be
injured by the table or by objects flying off
the table during
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident.
Always fold the rear center armrest 1
downward while the vehicle is in motion.
Without the armrest 1 folded down, the
rear center armrest could open the storage
compartment in an accident or during
abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored
there then could be thrown around in the
vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage
and/or personal injury.
302
4 To pull out the table
5 To swing the table to the side
6 Table
1 To raise the armrest
2 Loop
3 Folding table
Pull table 6 out vertically 4.
Lift up armrest 1.
Swing the table to the side 5.
Pull up folding table 3 vertically, us-
Lower armrest 1.
ing loop 2.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing the folding table
Refrigerator** in rear center console
Fold the table halves together.
Swing the table upward vertically.
Press the table until it engages at the
base of the folding table.
If necessary, lift up the armrest.
Swing the folding table back com-
pletely.
7
8
9
a
Fold out table half
Table half
Move table surface fore and aft
Tilt table surface
Fold out table half 8 from 7.
Press button 9 and adjust the table
fore or aft to the desired position.
Press button a to adjust the table
surface tilt. When you have obtained
the desired tilt, release the button.
Lower the armrest.
Warning!
G
Always fold the rear center armrest downward while the vehicle is in motion. Without the armrest folded down, the rear
center armrest could open the storage
compartment in an accident or during
abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored
there then could be thrown around in the
vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage
and/or personal injury.
!
In especially humid regions, water can
condense inside the refrigerator. For
this reason, wipe out the refrigerator
regularly. For more information on
vehicle care ( page 399).
303
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Opening the refrigerator
Turning refrigerator on
The refrigerator continues to operate
for up to 2 hours after the ignition
has been switched off. If the onboard voltage falls below the minimum level, the refrigerator will be
turned off automatically.
Lift up the rear center armrest up-
Turn knob 4 from OFF position 7
Therefore, do not leave any perishable goods in the refrigerator.
ward.
Reach into the opening and lift up re-
clockwise.
The refrigerator is on.
lease catch 1.
Open cover 2.
Turning refrigerator off
Turn knob 4 counterclockwise to
Refrigerator control
Do not leave any open groceries in
the refrigerator.
OFF position 7. Make sure the rotary
control is turned fully counterclockwise, until an audible “click” is heard.
Regulating the temperature
Turn knob 4 to the desired position.
!
1 To release the cover
2 To open the refrigerator
3 Refrigerator
304
4
5
6
7
Control knob
To increase cooling
To decrease cooling
To turn off the refrigerator
When setting max. cooling, the temperature in the refrigerator may fall
below freezing point. Objects stored
in the refrigerator such as water bottles may burst.
Closing the refrigerator
Press the lid down until it engages.
Controls in detail
Useful features
The power outlet can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a
maximum of 180 W.
Power outlets
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Flip up cover.
i
1 Socket in the trunk
Make sure the override switch is not
activated ( page 105). The socket in
the rear center console will not function if the override switch is activated.
1 Socket in the rear center console
!
Make sure no fluids come into contact with the socket, as this could
cause a short circuit.
1 Socket in the rear center console
(vehicles with a rear center seat*)
1 Socket in the front passenger footwell (vehicles with non-smokers package*)
305
Controls in detail
Useful features
Battery charge socket
The vehicle is equipped with a battery
charge socket. The socket allows for the
connection of the Maybach battery
charger* designed to charge the vehicle
consumer battery or to maintain the existing charge in the vehicle consumer
battery while the vehicle is parked and
not being driven for long periods of time
(on average approximately 3 weeks or
more). Not driving the vehicle for such
extended periods of time may cause the
charge in the vehicle batteries to drop.
The socket is located in the storage compartment on the left side of the trunk.
Only the Maybach battery charger*
should be connected to this socket.
i
If the battery for electrical consumers
is deeply discharged, it may take up
to approximately 20 hours for the
battery to be charged using the
Maybach battery charger*.
1 Handle
2 Battery charge socket
3 Storage compartment
Turn handle 1 90°.
Swing the cover down.
Connect the Maybach battery charg-
er* to battery charge socket 2. Follow the separate operating
instructions for the Maybach battery
charger*.
i
You can obtain the Maybach battery
charger* at any authorized Maybach
Studio. Check with an authorized
Maybach Studio for availability.
306
If faster charging is required, a standard battery charger may be needed.
Using a standard battery charger will
require that you disconnect and remove the battery for electrical consumers. For more information, see
“Practical hints” ( page 471).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear window curtain
The driver’s button is in the lower part of
the front center console under the cover
for the cup holders. Depending on vehicle equipment configuration, the button
in the rear is either in the center console
or in the top of the center armrest.
Operating from the cockpit
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Opening the curtain
Briefly press button 2.
The curtain opens automatically.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Operating from the rear
Rear button (only Maybach 57 without rear
door window curtains* and with rear seat*)
1 To close/open the curtain
Closing the curtain
Briefly press button 1.
The curtain closes automatically.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Button in cockpit
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Rear button (only Maybach 57 without rear
door window curtains*)
Closing the curtain
1 To close/open the curtain
Briefly press button 1.
The curtain closes automatically.
307
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the curtain
Opening the curtain
Briefly press button 1.
Lightly press button 2 to resistance
point.
The curtain opens automatically.
The curtain will open until you release the button.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)
Press button 1 past the resistance
point and release.
Rear button (example illustration from vehicles with rear door window curtains* and
with rear center seat*)
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
Rear button (example illustration from vehicles with rear door window curtains*)
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest ( page 291).
308
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest ( page 292).
Closing the curtain
Lightly press button 1 to resistance
point.
The curtain will close until you release the button.
The curtain closes completely.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)
Press button 2 past the resistance
point and release.
The curtain opens completely.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear door window curtains*
The driver’s switches are in the lower
part of the front center console under
the cover for the cup holders. Depending
on equipment, the button in the rear is
either in the center console or in the top
of the center armrest.
Operating from the cockpit
i
If you open a rear door window without rear door window curtain completely open, the curtain will open
first.
Closing the curtain
Briefly press upper part 1 of
button 3 or 4.
The respective curtain closes.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Opening the curtain
Briefly press lower part 2 of
button 3 or 4.
Warning!
G
When operating the curtains, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
The opening or closing procedure can be
immediately halted by pressing the respective button again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
The respective curtain opens.
To stop the procedure, press the butButton in cockpit
ton again.
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
3 Button for rear left door window curtain
4 Button for rear right door window
curtain
309
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing the curtain
Operating from the rear
Lightly press upper part 1 of
button 3 or 4 to resistance point.
The respective curtain will close until
you release the button.
Opening the curtain
Lightly press lower part 2 of
button 3 or 4 to resistance point.
Rear button
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
3 Button for rear left door window curtain
4 Button for rear right door window
curtain
Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest ( page 291).
310
Rear button (vehicles with rear center seat*)
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
3 Button for rear left door window curtain
4 Button for rear right door window
curtain
Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest ( page 292).
The respective curtain will open until
you release the button.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)
Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)
Press upper part 1 of
Press lower part 2 of button 3 or 4
button 3 or 4 past the resistance
point and release.
past the point of resistance and release.
The curtain closes completely.
The curtain opens completely.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Warning!
G
When operating the curtains, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
The opening or closing procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the respective button or, if button was pressed
past the resistance point and released, by
pressing the respective button 3 or 4
again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
311
Controls in detail
Useful features
Partition*
Operating the partition
Warning!
G
When operating the partition, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
The opening or closing procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the button or, if the button was pressed past the
resistance point and released, by pressing
the respective button again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
312
Button in cockpit
1 To close the partition
2 To open the partition
Button in rear passenger compartment
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
i
1 To close the partition
2 To open the partition
Closing the partition from the rear is
not possible if you activate the override switch ( page 105).
Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest ( page 291).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing the partition
Lightly press button 1 to resistance
point.
The partition will close until you release the button.
Opening the partition
Fully closing the partition
(Express-close)
Press button 1 past the resistance
point and release.
The partition closes completely.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Lightly press button 2 to resistance
point.
Button in rear passenger compartment
(vehicles with rear center seat*)
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
1 To close the partition
2 To open the partition
The partition will open until you release the button.
Fully opening the partition
(Express-open)
Press button 2 past the point of re-
sistance and release.
The partition opens completely.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest ( page 292).
313
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operating the partition curtain
Warning!
G
When operating the curtains, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
The opening or closing procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the button or, if the button was pressed past the
resistance point and released, by pressing
the respective button again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
314
Button in cockpit
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Button in rear passenger compartment
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest ( page 291).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the curtain
Lightly press button 2 to resistance
point.
The curtain will open until you release the button.
Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)
Press button 1 past the resistance
point and release.
Button in rear passenger compartment
(vehicles with rear center seat*)
(The mobile phone shown is not an available
option and is subject to change)
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest ( page 292).
Closing the curtain
Lightly press button 1 to resistance
The curtain closes completely.
Two-way intercom* (Maybach 62:
standard with partition*)
With the partition closed, you can communicate between the cockpit and the
rear passenger compartment using the
two-way intercom.
You can only initiate a voice connection
from the rear passenger compartment.
The driver can only signal a connection
request from the cockpit.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)
Press button 2 past the resistance
point and release.
The curtain opens completely.
To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
point.
The curtain will close until you release the button.
315
Controls in detail
Useful features
Signaling a connection request from the
cockpit
Initiating a voice connection from the
rear
The button is located on the lower part
of the front center console.
In Maybach 62 with a rear center seat* in
the storage compartment/drawer in rear
center console the buttons are on the
rear center console.
In Maybach 62 with a rear center seat*
the buttons are in the storage compartment/drawer in the rear center console.
1 On/off button
Press button 1.
A gong sounds in the rear passenger
compartment, and the indicator lamp
on the button comes on.
1 Volume control
2 Speak button
Maybach 62 with rear center seat*
1 Volume control
2 Speak button
Press button 2.
A gong sounds in the cockpit, and a
voice connection is established between the cockpit and the rear passenger compartment.
316
Controls in detail
Useful features
Adjusting the volume
Turn thumbwheel 1 until the de-
sired volume has been set.
Ending the voice connection
Press button 2 again in the rear pas-
senger compartment.
External communication
(special order equipment)
With the communication system, you can
communicate with persons outside the
vehicle over a loudspeaker and an outside microphone, without having to
open a door or window.
Take the control unit out of the glove
box.
Listening
Push microphone switch-over 5
downward.
You will hear what is being said outside of the vehicle.
Speaking
Press speak button 1 and keep it
pressed.
You can speak as long as you keep
button 1 pressed.
Adjust volume with the volume con-
trol button 2.
1
2
3
4
5
Speak button for inside microphone
Volume control
Loudspeaker for outside microphone
Inside microphone
Microphone switch-over
317
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel
The steering wheel heating warms up
the leather area of the steering wheel.
The stalk is located on the lower lefthand side of the steering wheel.
Switching on
Switching off
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
tion of arrow 1.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
The steering wheel heating is
switched off. Indicator lamp 2 goes
out.
i
i
The steering wheel heating is temporarily suspended while indicator
lamp 2 remains on when
1 Switching on
2 Indicator lamp
3 Switching off
tion of arrow 3.
the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86°F (30°C)
the temperature of the steering
wheel is above 79°F (26°C)
When these conditions do not apply
anymore, steering wheel heating
continues.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes or switches
off
in case of power surge or undervoltage
in case of a steering wheel heating malfunction
i
The steering wheel heating switches
off automatically when you remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**,
when you switch off the ignition
( page 62) and open the driver’s
door.
For information on the steering wheel,
see “Steering wheel” ( page 68).
318
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone
Warning!
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna
(i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while
the engine is running. Doing so could lead
to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or a citizens band unit, should
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
on the outside of the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call.
The external antenna must be approved
for Maybach vehicles. Please contact an
authorized Maybach Studio for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio
transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
319
Controls in detail
Useful features
You can receive and place telephone
calls using the s and t buttons on
the steering wheel. To carry out other
telephone functions, use the control system ( page 181).
Warning!
Always keep the compartment for the
front telephone closed while the vehicle is
in motion. The protruding telephone could
otherwise cause injury to you and others
during
See the separate operating manual
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual
System for instructions on how to use the
telephone.
Mobile phone in the front
Mobile phone cradles for GSM or CDMA
phones can be installed in the cockpit.
These mobile phone cradles can be obtained from an authorized Maybach
Studio.
The functions and services available to
you while using the mobile phone depend on your service provider and the
type of mobile phone you are using.
G
1 Compartment lid release button
2 Compartment lid
Opening
Press release button 1.
Compartment lid 2 opens downward. The telephone handset swings
out.
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident.
Closing
Press button 1 to close.
!
To prevent any damage, the mobile
phone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment.
i
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡
( page 330) are located in the compartment for the front telephone.
320
Controls in detail
Useful features
Push the top of the mobile phone in
Inserting the mobile phone in the mobile
phone cradle
direction of arrow 1, until the lug on
the mobile phone release button engages.
Once the mobile phone has been inserted in the mobile phone cradle, calls can
only be made via the hands-free system.
The mobile phone is connected to the
network via the external antenna.
!
The mobile phone is linked to the
hands-free device and the multifunction steering wheel.
Do not try to remove the mobile
phone along with the cradle. You
could otherwise damage the mobile
phone cradle.
Remove the cover for the external an-
tenna connection from the back of
the mobile phone and store it in a
safe place.
1 Insert the mobile phone
2 Connector contact
3 Mobile phone cradle
Slide the lower end of the mobile
phone into connector contact 2 on
cradle 3.
The battery is charged depending on
its charge status and the position of
the key in the ignition switch. The
charge procedure will be indicated in
the mobile phone’s display.
i
GSM mobile phone:
The phone books contained on the
SIM card and in the mobile phone’s
memory will be imported. If an identical entry has been stored in both
phone books, the entry will appear
twice in the multifunction display.
321
Controls in detail
Useful features
You can place or receive phone calls using the í and ì buttons in the
steering wheel. You can control other
functions of the mobile phone via the
control system ( page 181).
Removing the mobile phone from the
cradle
i
When you take the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** out of
the starter switch, the mobile phone
remains switched on for approx.
10 minutes (run-on time). If you place
or receive a call during this time, the
mobile phone switches off
10 minutes after the call has been
completed.
Changing the mobile phone cradle
Please contact an authorized Maybach
Studio if you require a different mobile
phone cradle for your GSM or CDMA mobile phone.
Removing an existing mobile phone cradle
1 Release catch for mobile phone
2 Mobile phone cradle
Press release catch in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out
of mobile phone cradle 2.
1 To release the mobile phone cradle
2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
3 Mobile phone cradle
Press release button in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone
cradle 3 out in direction of
arrow 2.
322
Controls in detail
Useful features
Installing a different mobile phone cradle
Cellular phone in the rear
Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth®. The Bluetooth® interface is located in the rear armrest.
Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest ( page 291).
Inserting the Bluetooth® interface into
cradle
4 Engage the Bluetooth® interface into
cradle
5 Release button
6 Button with indicator lamp
1 Contact plate
2 Recesses
3 Mobile phone cradle
Push the top of the Bluetooth® inter-
face in direction of arrow 4, until
the release button 5 engages.
Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
until it engages.
1 Insert the Bluetooth® interface
2 Contact
3 Cradle
The indicator lamp in the button 6
will flash slowly in blue, to indicate
that the interface is ready for pairing
with a Bluetooth® compatible mobile
phone.
Slide the lower end of the Bluetooth®
interface into contact 2 on
cradle 3.
323
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initializing pairing of Bluetooth® interface and mobile phone
Enter “0000” (four zeros), when
prompted to enter the passkey.
The indicator lamp in the button 1
will stop flashing and remain illuminated in blue.
The pairing of the Bluetooth® interface with your mobile phone was successful.
i
Pairing is only required once for each
handset.
1 Button with indicator lamp
To initialize pairing, press and hold
button 1 on the Bluetooth® interface until the indicator lamp in the
button begins to flash rapidly in blue.
®
Depending on which Bluetooth ca-
pable mobile phone you have, conduct a search for “devices within
range”, until you find the Bluetooth®
interface with the symbol “MB
BTUM”.
Select this symbol.
324
You will be able to make and receive
hands-free phone calls using the speakers and microphones installed in your vehicle.
You can also switch from hands-free
mode to privacy phone mode.
i
Please contact a authorized Maybach
Studio for the most recent list of
Bluetooth® capable mobile phones
that have been approved for use in
your vehicle.
For detailed instructions on how to
pair the Bluetooth® interface with
the mobile phone, please refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid
system may only be performed by
completing the subscriber agreement
and placing an acquaintance call using the Information button ¡, located in the phone compartment to
the left of the glove box. Failure to
complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Maybach
Assistance Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
automatic and manual emergency
Roadside Assistance and
information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel
or the volume control on the COMAND.
To raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç on the steering wheel
or use the volume knob on your
COMAND head unit.
To activate, press one of the SOS but-
tons, the Roadside Assistance
button • or the Information
button ¡, depending on the type
of response required.
Warning!
G
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
325
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
i
The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel ( page 328). An
additional SOS button is located in
the middle armrest of the rear seat
or, in Maybach 62 vehicles with rear
center seat* and partition* or twoway intercom*, in the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console.
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and
the GPS (Global Positioning System)
satellites for vehicle location. If either
of these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and
if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located in the front telephone compartment ( page 330).
Shortly after the completion of your
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password.
System self-check
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
malfunctions are detected and indicated
(the indicator lamps in the SOS button,
the Roadside Assistance button • and
the Information button ¡ stay on
longer than 10 seconds or do not come
on). The message
TELE AID MALFUNCTION
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
appears for approximately 10 seconds in
the multifunction display.
326
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button • and/
or in the Information button ¡ do not
come on during the system self-check or if
any of these indicators remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or the message
TELE AID MALFUNCTION
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in
the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
airbags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover in the
overhead control panel labeled SOS,
then briefly pressing the button located
under the cover. An additional SOS button is located in the middle armrest of
the rear seat or, in Maybach 62 vehicles
with rear center seat* and partition* or
with rear center seat* and two-way intercom*, in the storage compartment/
drawer in rear center console.
For instructions on initiating an emergency call manually ( page 328).
When the connection is established, the
message
The Tele Aid system is available if:
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services,
connection and cellular air time.
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center.
CALL CONNECTED
appears in the multifunction display.
All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location
system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the
vehicle will be established automatically
soon after the emergency call has been
initiated. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the
nature of the emergency provided they
can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is
only possible if the vehicle is able to
receive signals from the GPS satellite
network and pass the information on
to the Response Center.
Once the emergency call is in progress,
the indicator lamp in the SOS button will
begin to flash. The message
CONNECTING CALL
appears in the multifunction display.
327
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Initiating an emergency call manually
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message
CALL FAILED
appears in the multifunction display for
approximately 10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
SOS button in the rear center console
SOS button in the overhead control panel
1 Cover
2 SOS button
328
1 Cover
2 SOS button
Controls in detail
Useful features
For Maybach 57 with rear center seat*:
the additional SOS button is located in
the rear center console.
For Maybach 62 with rear center seat*:
the additional SOS button is located in
the storage compartment/drawer.
Briefly press on the cover of the
emergency call button 1 with the
inscription SOS.
The cover will open.
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
flashes until the emergency call is
concluded.
Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
sponse Center.
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
SOS button* in the rear center console
Warning!
1 Cover
2 SOS button
SOS button* in the storage compartment/
drawer
1 Cover
2 SOS button
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in
the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location),
please do not wait for voice contact after
you have pressed the emergency button.
Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a
safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate
location if they receive an automatic SOS
signal and cannot make voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
329
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button •
When the connection is established, the
message
The Roadside Assistance button • is
located in the front telephone compartment.
CALL CONNECTED
appears in the multifunction display. The
Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to
availability of cellular and GPS signals).
1 Compartment lid release
2 Information button ¡
3 Roadside Assistance button •
Press and hold Roadside Assistance
1 Compartment lid release
2 Compartment lid
Press button 1.
The compartment lid 2 opens downward.
button • (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to a Maybach Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button • flashes while the
call is in progress. The message
CONNECTING CALL
will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted.
330
A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established.
Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
The Maybach Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Maybach technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Maybach Studio. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual
for more information.
Controls in detail
Useful features
The following is only available in the
USA:
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel
or the replacement of a flat tire with
the vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
i
The indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately
10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on ignition
(together with the SOS button and
the Information button ¡).
See system self-check ( page 326)
when the indicator lamp does not
come on in red or stays on longer
than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message
CALL FAILED
appears in the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the t button on
the multifunction steering wheel or
the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND head
unit.
Information button ¡
The Information button ¡ is located
in the front telephone compartment
( page 330).
Press and hold Information
button ¡ (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The
button ¡ flashes while the call is in
progress. The message
CONNECTING CALL
will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted.
331
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the connection is established, the
message
CALL CONNECTED
appears in the multifunction display. The
Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to
availability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and
the occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest
authorized Maybach Studio or
Maybach USA products and services is
available to you.
i
The indicator lamp on the Information button ¡ remains illuminated
in red for approximately 10 seconds
during the system self-check after
switching on ignition (together with
the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •).
332
See system self-check ( page 326)
when the indicator lamp does not
come on in red or stays on longer
than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Information button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center
has been established, then the Tele
Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available).
The message
CALL FAILED
appears in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated
using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND head
unit.
!
If the indicator lamps do not start
flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at
any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is
not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Maybach Studio
and have the system checked or contact the Maybach Assistance Center
at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA)
or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada) as
soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Call priority
i
Remote door unlock
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In
this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the COMAND system audio is
muted and the selected mode (radio,
tape or CD) pauses. The mobile phone
switches off. If it is necessary for you
to use this phone, then the vehicle
must be parked. Disconnect the
coiled cord and place the call. The
COMAND navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is
available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing
the button on the COMAND
unit. A pop-up window will appear in
the COMAND display to indicate that
a Tele Aid call is in progress.
In case that you have locked your vehicle
unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not
mobile phone:
i
The indicator lamp in the corresponding button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated
by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button t on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND head
unit.
Contact the Maybach Assistance Cen-
ter at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your
password which you provided when
you completed the subscriber agreement.
Then return to your vehicle and pull
the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing.
The message
CALL CONNECTED
!
If the indicator lamp continues to
flash or the system does not reset,
contact the Maybach Assistance
Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the
completion of your acquaintance call.
333
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Response Center will then unlock
your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.
i
The remote door unlock feature is
available if the relevant cellular
phone network is available.
The SOS button flashes and the message
CALL CONNECTED
will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door
unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt
to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was
pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was
received by the Response Center, you
must wait 15 minutes before pulling
the trunk recessed handle.
334
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
i
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
When the anti-theft alarm or the
tow-away alarm stays on for more
than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center.
See anti-theft alarm system
( page 115) and tow-away alarm
( page 117).
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
Pass this number on to the Maybach
Response Center along with your
password issued to you when you
subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the
vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location
will only be provided to law enforcement.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener
The integrated remote control is capable
of operating up to three separately controlled devices. It provides a convenient
way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices
such as garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with
HomeLink® or some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control
can be used, it must be programmed to
the garage door opener, gate operator
or other device you wish to operate. See
the following instructions for programming information.
Warning!
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control
1
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of
vehicle equipment):
5
Hand-held remote control of
garage door opener, gate operator or other device
6
Hand-held remote control button
G
Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or
gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to
prevent potential harm or damage. When
programming a garage door opener, the
door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or
closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object – signaling the door to stop and reverse – does not meet current U.S. federal
safety standards.
When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation
of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health.
All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
335
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control
Step 1:
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Step 2:
If you have previously programmed
an signal transmitter button and wish
to retain its programming, proceed
to step 3.
If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time,
press and hold the two outer signal
transmitter buttons 3 and 4 and release them only when the indicator
lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the
button for longer than 30 seconds).
This procedure erases any previous
settings for all three channels and initializes the memory.
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and
begin directly with step 3.
336
Step 3:
Step 5:
Hold the end of the hand-held re-
After the indicator lamp 1 changes
mote control 5 of the device you
wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be
programmed, while keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
Step 4:
Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held remote control
button 6 and the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do
not release the buttons until step 5 is
completed.
The indicator lamp 1 will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly.
i
The indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this
button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will
only start flashing after 20 seconds.
from a slow to a rapidly flashing
light, release the hand-held remote
control button and the signal transmitter button.
Step 6:
Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe the indicator lamp 1.
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the respective signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and released.
i
If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with
programming steps 8 through 12 as
your garage door opener may be
equipped with the “rolling code”
feature.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 7:
Step 9:
Step 12:
To program the remaining two signal
Press the “training” button on the
Confirm the garage door operation
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling
code feature, follow these instructions
after completing the “Programming”
portion (steps 1 through 6) of this text.
(A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
Locate “training” button on the ga-
rage door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener
brand. Depending on manufacturer,
the “training” button may also be referred to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the
transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener operator’s manual.
garage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the following two steps.
Step 10:
Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
by pressing the programmed signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 13:
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
hold for 2 seconds and release the
programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 11:
Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training
process.
i
Some garage door openers (or other
rolling code equipped devices) may
require you to press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal
transmitter button a third time to
complete the training process.
337
Controls in detail
Useful features
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Step 4:
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or
quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for
the integrated signal transmitter to pick
up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate
operators are designed to “time-out” in
the same manner.
Press and hold the signal transmitter
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures,
replace step 4 with the following:
338
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successfully trained.
While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control button 6 as follows: Press and
hold button 6 for 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, and again press
and hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this
sequence on the hand-held remote
control until the frequency signal has
been learned. Upon successful training, the indicator lamp 1 will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds.
Proceed with programming step 5
and step 6 to complete.
i
Upon completion of programming
the integrated remote control, make
sure you retain the hand-held remote
control that came with the garage
door opener, gate operator or other
device. You may need it for use in
other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a
hand-held remote control to operate
the respective device in other situations.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button
Erasing the remote control memory
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
Simultaneously press and hold down
the outer signal transmitter
buttons 3 and 4, for approximately
20 seconds, until the indicator
lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do
not release the button.
flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the signal transmitter button,
proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
Select and press the appropriate inte-
grated signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote
controlled device.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
While performing step 3, hold the
hand-held remote control 5 at different lengths and angles from the
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4) you are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance
of 2 to 5 inches (5 to 12 cm) away or
the same angle at varying distances.
If another hand-held remote control
is available for the same device, try
the programming steps again using
that other hand-held remote control.
Make sure new batteries are in the
hand-held remote control before beginning the procedure.
Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/
or receiving signals.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
The indicator lamp 1 will begin to
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Put a new battery in the hand-held
remote control 5. This will increase
the likelihood of the hand-held remote control sending a faster and
more accurate signal to the integrated remote control.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Operation of integrated remote control
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the
codes of all three channels.
Programming tips
If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
Check the frequency of the handheld remote control 5 (typically located on the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control
is compatible with radio-frequency
devices operating between
288-399 MHz.
339
340
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
341
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section, you will find
detailed information on operating,
maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more
satisfied you will be with its performance
later on.
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2⁄3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).
Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever.
Select gear positions 3, 2 or 1 only
when driving at moderate speeds
(for hill driving).
Select C as the preferred shift program ( page 203) for the first
1000 miles (1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
342
!
All of the above instructions, as may
apply to your vehicle type, also apply
when driving the first 1000 miles
(1500 km) after the engine or the
rear differential has been replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating
conditions.
Drinking and driving
To save fuel you should:
Warning!
Pedals
G
Keep tires at the recommended tire
inflation pressures.
Remove unnecessary loads.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you
drink or take drugs and drive.
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in
the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of
all obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
343
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Warning!
G
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake
system operation and switch it into its
emergency operation mode. In such a case,
the red brake warning lamp ( page 414)
and warning messages in the instrument
cluster come on while driving
(see page 429 to page 430). To brake, the
driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the
pedal much further to obtain the expected
braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only
be applied to the front wheels. Stopping
distance is increased!
344
If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that
the vehicle be transported with all wheels
off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar
must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing
methods and the vehicle requires towing
with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is only permissible for distances up
to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle”
( page 478).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle.
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through
water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be
somewhat reduced and increased pedal
pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in a safe location in sufficient time
to avoid an accident.
Operation
Driving instructions
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake
the vehicle with considerable force prior
to parking. The heat generated serves to
dry the brakes.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system
may be the reason for low brake fluid in
the reservoir.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will
also enhance the grip of the brake pads.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) ( page 108).
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in
the reservoir is too low.
Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by us for use on Maybach
vehicles.
Warning!
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use
the engine’s braking power. This
helps prevent overheating of the
brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time, rather than immediately park the vehicle, so that the
air stream can cool down the brakes faster.
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended
brake fluid is used, the braking properties
of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident.
345
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure
only when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been
reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface,
do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. Doing so may cause serious damage
to the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Maybach Limited Warranty.
i
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake
reduces engine performance and
causes premature brake and drivetrain wear.
346
!
Parking
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a
result of inadvertent vehicle movement,
before turning off the engine and leaving
the vehicle always:
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press the
start/stop button ( page 63) (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO**).
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock
vehicle when leaving.
Set the parking brake whenever
parking or leaving the vehicle.
In addition, move gear selector lever
to position P.
When parking on hills, turn front
wheels towards the curb.
Operation
Driving instructions
Tires
Warning!
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning
flashers, carefully slow down, and drive
with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or
tire dealer for repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required
by law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
G
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1⁄16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1⁄8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if
the tires are subject to extreme operating conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy
loads, high ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water
layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new
tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track
grooves in the road and apply brakes
cautiously in the rain.
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.
347
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered
or icy road is always lower than on a dry
road.
( page 491) for a listing of winter tires
approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles.
You should pay particular attention to
the condition of the road whenever the
outside temperatures are close to the
freezing point.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
!
Maybach 57, Maybach 62
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 168 mph (270 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
Maybach 57 S
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
We recommend winter tires
( page 395) for the winter season for all
four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed
snow, they can reduce your stopping distance in comparison to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
appropriate caution. Refer to “Rims and
tires” in the “Technical data” section
348
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire rating, local speed
limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
171 mph (275 km/h).
i
For more Information, see “Tire
speed rating for winter tires”
( page 394).
For additional general information
on tire speed markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating”
( page 382).
Operation
Driving instructions
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or
icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
control system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move gear selector lever to
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
i
For more Information on driving with
snow chains, see “Snow chains”
( page 395).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This
could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS
will not prevent this type of control loss.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
Warning!
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the
vehicle not facing the wind.
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above
the freezing point do not guarantee that
the road surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving” ( page 394).
349
Operation
Driving instructions
Standing water
Passenger compartment
!
G
Do not drive through flooded areas
or water of unknown depth. Before
driving through water, determine its
depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could
force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging
them.
Warning!
If you must drive through standing
water, drive slowly to prevent water
from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could
cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or
transmission, or could result in water
being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
350
Control and operation of radio transmitters
COMAND, radio and telephone
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
Warning!
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive Maybach
service network at your disposal. If you
plan to drive into areas which are not
listed in the index of your Maybach
Studio directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized
Maybach Studio.
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Operation
Driving instructions
Telephones and two-way radios
Warning!
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
without being connected to an external
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/
or personal injury.
Catalytic converter
Your Maybach is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial
control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our
recommended maintenance instructions
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
!
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or citizens band unit should
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
on the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be dealt with
promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic
converter, causing it to overheat and
potentially start a fire.
Warning!
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly
according to factory specifications. Any
adjustments to the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified
Maybach Studio authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out
regularly according to Maybach servicing
requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
351
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive with at least
one window fully open at all times.
352
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).
!
The engine should not be operated
with the coolant temperature over
248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not
covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which may
have leaked into the engine compartment,
to catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just by
opening the engine hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
G
The fuel filler flap is located on the right
hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear.
the point indicated by the arrow 1.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
Push up the fuel filler flap to fully
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around
gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin
contact, extinguish all smoking materials.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** automatically locks/
unlocks the fuel filler flap.
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
open.
Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold
on to it until possible pressure is released.
Take off the cap and set it in the re-
cess on the fuel filler flap 2.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
1 Push to open the fuel filler flap
2 Set the fuel cap
Turn the engine off
by using the SmartKey, remove
the SmartKey from the starter
switch
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO**
start/stop button ( page 63),
open the driver’s door (with the
driver’s door open, starter switch
is now in position 0, same as
SmartKey removed from the starter switch).
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Only fill your tank until the filler noz-
zle unit cuts out – do not top up or
overfill.
353
Operation
At the gas station
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
Replace fuel cap by turning it clock-
wise until it audibly engages.
Close the fuel filler flap.
354
i
i
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/
86 MON).
Leaving the engine running and the
fuel cap open can cause
the ? lamp to illuminate.
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
For more information on gasoline,
see the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” ( page 415).
Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip
Brake fluid
!
1 Brake fluid electro-hydraulic brake
system only
2 Coolant level
3 Brake fluid
4 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
i
Opening hood ( page 356).
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Maybach Studio
immediately. Do not add brake fluid
as this will not solve the problem. For
more information, see “Practical
hints” ( page 414).
Coolant
For more information, see “Coolant level” ( page 361) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” ( page 495).
Engine oil level
For more information, see “Engine oil”
( page 357).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs,
see “Replacing bulbs” ( page 458).
See also the section on the exterior lamp
switch ( page 155).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information on tire inflation
pressure ( page 375).
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system
For more information on refilling the reservoir, see “Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system”
( page 363).
355
Operation
Engine compartment
Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radi-
Hood
ator grille.
Warning!
G
Lift bottom of hood at edge of radia-
tor grille.
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood
could be forced open by passing air flow.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height.
Warning!
Opening
2 Handle for opening the hood
Lift hood slightly.
Handle 2 will extend out of the radiator grille.
!
Do not pull up the hood on
handle 2.
1 Release lever
Pull release lever 1 in direction of ar-
row.
The hood is unlocked.
356
To avoid damage to the windshield
wipers or hood, never open the hood
if the wiper arms are folded forward
away from the windshield.
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear
of moving parts when the hood is open
and the engine is running. Make sure the
hood is properly closed before driving.
When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, or if the coolant
temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood.
Move away from vehicle and do not open
the hood until the engine has cooled. If
necessary, call the fire department.
Closing
Warning!
G
Be careful that you do not close the hood
on anyone.
Let the hood drop from a height of
approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high
voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets,
diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
with the engine running
while starting the engine
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let
it drop with somewhat greater force.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption
can occur when
the vehicle is new
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should
only be made after the vehicle break-in
period.
!
Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives
not approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles may cause damage
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
More information on this subject is
available at any Maybach Studio.
357
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the control system
When checking the oil level
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the
engine turned off
with the engine not at operating
temperature yet, the vehicle must
have been stationary for at least
30 minutes with the engine turned
off
You can check the engine oil level on the
multifunction display.
Press button k or j on the
steering wheel until the following
message is seen in the multifunction
display:
For adding oil ( page 360).
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the indicator:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
OK
ADD 1.0 QT. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
ADD 1.5 QTS. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL
(Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
ADD 2.0 QTS. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL
(Canada: 2.0 LITERS)
358
If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press button k or j
on the multifunction steering wheel.
If necessary, add engine oil.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
The standard display ( page 178)
should appear in the multifunction display.
i
For more information on engine oil, see
“Technical data” ( page 495) and
( page 496).
Operation
Engine compartment
Other display messages
If you see the message:
If the ignition is not switched on, the following message will appear:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOT WHEN ENGINE ON
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL
SWITCH IGNITION ON
Turn off the engine.
Switch on the ignition.
If you see the message:
PERF. SERV. ON TIME
If engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before repeating
check procedure.
If engine is not at operating temper-
ature yet, wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure.
If the engine is at operating tempera-
ture, wait 5 minutes before checking
oil.
If the engine is not at operating tem-
perature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil.
If there is excessive engine oil with the
engine at normal operating temperature, the following message will appear:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
!
Excessive oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to
the engine and catalytic converter
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see “Practical hints” ( page 437).
359
Operation
Engine compartment
!
Adding engine oil
Excessive oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to
the engine and catalytic converter
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
!
Only use approved engine oils and oil
filters required for vehicles with
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of
approved engine oils and oil filters,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles), or changing of oil and oil
filter at change intervals longer than
those called for by the Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles) will result in engine damage
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
360
Screw the filler cap 1 back on the
filler neck.
1 Filler cap
Unscrew the filler cap 1 from filler
neck.
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage
caused by oil entering the ground or water.
For more information on engine oil, see
“Technical data” ( page 495) and
( page 496).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not
need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Maybach
Studio check the automatic transmission.
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
Warning!
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
glycol which may burn if it comes into
contact with hot engine parts.
Use extreme caution when opening
the hood if there are any signs of
steam or coolant leaking from the
cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid
and is under pressure.
proximately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess
pressure.
Continue turning cap 2 counter-
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
In order to avoid any possibly serious
burns:
Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly ap-
clockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
for cold coolant: reaches the
marking 3 inside coolant reservoir
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
Add coolant as required.
Replace and tighten cap 2.
For more information on coolant, see
“Technical data” ( page 499).
1 Coolant expansion tank
2 Cap
3 Cold coolant level mark
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown
out under pressure.
361
Operation
Engine compartment
Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
G
Observe all safety instructions
and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
E
Wear eye protection.
Starter battery (located in the engine
compartment).
Risk of explosion.
Electrical consumer battery (located
in the trunk).
C
Keep children away.
A
D
Keep flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
F
Follow the instructions in this
Operator’s Manual.
B
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve their
rated service life. Refer to Maintenance
Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for shortdistance trips, you will need to have the
battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing batteries, always use
batteries approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time,
consult an authorized Maybach Studio
about steps you need to observe.
362
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clean
water and seek medical help
if necessary.
Batteries contain materials that can
harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the
preferred method of disposal. Many
states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment.
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.
Refill the reservoir with MB Wind-
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper
washer fluid can damage the plastic
lenses of the headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield
and headlamp washer system”
( page 501).
shield Washer Concentrate and water
(or commercially available pre-mixed
windshield washer solvent/
antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
1 Washer fluid reservoir
Fluid for the windshield washer system
and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of approximately
7.1 US qt (6.7 l).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could
result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” to
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container.
363
Operation
Tires and wheels
See an authorized Maybach Studio for
information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter
operation. They can also offer advice
concerning tire service and purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. See an authorized
Maybach Studio for further information. If
incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted:
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.
The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer
guaranteed.
364
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only Genuine
Maybach wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles,
since previous damage cannot always be
recognized on retreads. We can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.
See an authorized Maybach Studio for
information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter
operation.
Important guidelines
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
Tires must be of the correct size for
the rim.
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with samesized wheels all around).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire inspection
Life of tire
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
The service life of a tire is dependent
upon varying factors including but not
limited to:
Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
excessive treadwear ( page 366)
Driving style
cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
Tire inflation pressure
Distance driven
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Tire care and maintenance
Warning!
G
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation
pressure, see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” ( page 373).
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the
above conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and become worn
over time even if never used, and thus
should be inspected and replaced when
necessary.
Warning!
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after 6 years, regardless of the remaining
tread.
365
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads
are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required
by law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor
safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
366
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light
as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Cleaning tires
!
Never use a round nozzle to powerwash tires. The intense jet of water
can result in damage to the tire.
Recommended minimum tire tread
depth:
Storing tires
Always replace a damaged tire.
1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you
must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning)
of the tire.
i
Spare wheels may be mounted
against the direction of rotation
(spinning) even with a unidirectional
tire for temporary use only until the
regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. Always observe
and follow applicable temporary use
restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel.
Loading the vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry.
The Tire and Loading Information
placard (Example A) or the Vehicle
Tire Information placard (Example B)
can be found on the driver’s door
B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number
of people that can be in the vehicle
and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size and
recommended tire inflation pressures
for the original equipment tires on
your vehicle.
The Certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you
about the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo. The Certification label also tells you about the
front and rear axle weight capacity,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either
the front axle or rear axle.
367
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information
Warning!
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the
two placards with regards to loading
your vehicle.
Placard (Example A)
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B).
i
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Load
limit data are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in the
illustrations below. Refer to placard
on vehicle for actual data specific to
your vehicle.
368
1 Load limit information on the Tire
and Loading Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. If your vehicle is equipped with
the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A), locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” on this placard. The
combined weight of all occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue load (if applicable) should never exceed the weight
referenced in that statement.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B)
Seating capacity
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is
equipped with either placard Example A
or placard Example B located on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368).
i
1 Load limit information on the Vehicle
Tire Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. If your vehicle is equipped with
the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B), locate the heading “Vehicle
Capacity Weight” on this placard. The
combined weight of all occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue (if applicable) should never exceed the weight listed next to vehicle capacity weight.
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Seating
data are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on
vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
Placard (Example A)
1 Seating capacity
Placard (Example B)
1 Seating capacity
369
Operation
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining correct load limit
Step 3
Step 6 (if applicable)
The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers
under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety
Act of 1966”.
Subtract the combined weight of the
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle
( page 372).
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example A)
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
Step 4
The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lbs. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example B)
Step 5
Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Determine the combined weight of
Weight” on your vehicle’s placard.
Step 2
Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
370
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
step 4.
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load
limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s placard ( page 368).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined
weight limit
of occupants
and cargo
from placard
Number of Seating
occupants
configura(driver and tion
passengers)
Occupants weight
Combined
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or
occupants
vehicle capacity weight from placard
minus combined weight of all occupants)
1
5
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
750 lbs
1500 lbs – 750 lbs = 750 lbs
540 lbs
1500 lbs – 540 lbs = 960 lbs
150 lbs
1500 lbs – 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
1500 lbs
front: 2
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
rear: 3
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2
1500 lbs
3
front: 1
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
rear: 2
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3
1500 lbs
1
front: 1
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants,
the less cargo and luggage load capacity
is available.
For more information, see “Trailer
tongue load” ( page 372).
371
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) ( page 372) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make
sure your vehicle never exceeds the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the
Certification label. The Certification Label can be found on the driver’s door
B-pillar, see “Technical data”
( page 488).
372
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue
load ( page 372) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The
total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and
rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo
and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded)
weighed on a suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your
vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the tongue
load must be added to the weight of all
occupants riding and any cargo you are
carrying in the vehicle. The tongue load
typically is 10 percent of the trailer
weight and everything loaded in it.
Your Maybach has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo.
We not recommend trailer towing with
your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) located on the
driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be con-
sidered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Placard (Example A)
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on placard.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the tire placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the
fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations. For more information,
see “Important notes on tire inflation
pressure” ( page 374).
i
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Tire
data are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on
vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example A) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for
maximum loaded vehicle weight. The
tire inflation pressures listed apply to the
tires installed as original equipment.
373
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B)
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly
drops:
1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example B) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the
tires installed as original equipment.
i
Placard (Example B) may list
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for different vehicle loads.
374
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
Check to see whether air is leaking
from the valves or from around the
rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the
tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the
fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive
heat can build up and result in sudden
tire failure.
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for
vehicle loads less than the maximum
loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on
the placard located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F
(10°C) of air temperature change. Keep
this in mind when checking tire inflation
pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The
tires can be considered cold if the vehicle
has been parked for at least 3 hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting
less than 3 hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not
let air out to match the specified cold tire
inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire
will be underinflated.
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire.
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
( page 368). If necessary, add air to
achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure.
i
If you have overfilled the tire, release
tire inflation pressure by pushing the
metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip
of a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
You can call up the tire inflation pressure
monitoring display using the control
system ( page 173).
i
After you have reactivated the tire inflation pressure monitor, the current
tire inflation pressures will only be
shown after a few minutes’ driving
time.
During this time, you will see the following message in the multifunction
display:
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
APPEARS AFTER
DRIVING A FEW
MINUTES
Checking tire inflation pressure
electronically
i
Install the valve cap.
The tire inflation pressure monitor only
functions on wheels that are equipped
with the proper electronic sensors. It
monitors the tire inflation pressure, as
selected by the driver, in all four tires. A
warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in tire inflation pressure in one or
more of the tires.
Possible differences between the
readings of a tire inflation pressure
gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas station
equipment, and the vehicle’s control
system can occur. The readings issued
by the control system are more precise.
375
Operation
Tires and wheels
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
( page 178).
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the current tire inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
When the tire inflation pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper tire inflation pressure as indicated
on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Each tire, including the
spare, should be checked monthly when
cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and owner’s manual.
i
The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on
the tire placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). The
tire inflation pressures are not listed
in the owner’s manual.
376
Warning!
G
The tire inflation pressure monitor does
not indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures. Always adjust
tire inflation pressure according to the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
i
Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, twoway radios) in or near the vehicle
could cause the tire inflation pressure
monitor to malfunction.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Reactivating the tire inflation pressure
monitor
The tire inflation pressure monitor must
be reactivated in the following situations:
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the current tire inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
multifunction display or the following message appears in the multifunction display:
if you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
if you have replaced the wheels or
tires
TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
APPEARS AFTER
DRIVING A FEW
MINUTES
if you have installed new wheels or
tires
i
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure
the tire inflation pressure of all four
tires is correct.
Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
( page 173).
If you are transporting a deflated tire
in the vehicle, do not activate the tire
inflation pressure monitor until
the deflated tire is no longer in
the vehicle
you have inflated the tire to the
correct tire inflation pressure
Press the reset button J in the instrument cluster ( page 169).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
MONITOR CURRENT
TIRE
PRESSURES?
377
Operation
Tires and wheels
Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATED
The tire inflation pressure monitor
will now monitor the tire inflation
pressure values of all four tires.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
APPEARS AFTER
DRIVING A FEW
MINUTES
This display appears until the individual tire inflation pressure values are
matched with the tires. The individual values are then displayed
( page 376).
378
If you wish to cancel activation:
Press the ç button.
If one of the following messages appears
in the multifunction display:
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATE AFTER
CORRECTING PRESSURE
TIRE PRESSURE
PLEASE CORRECT
Check the tire inflation pressures and
correct them if necessary.
Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
monitor.
Speed limitation in the event of tire
problems
If the tire inflation pressure falls below a
certain value or in case of a flat tire, your
vehicle speed is automatically limited to
50 mph (80 km/h) and the message:
LIMIT 50 MPH TIRE FAILURE
(Canada: LIMIT 80 KM/H TIRE FAILURE)
appears in the multifunction display. Additional warning messages may also appear in the multifunction display. Read
and observe the warning messages in the
multifunction display and follow the instructions for each message. See the
“Practical hints” section ( page 424) for
a listing of warning messages and instructions.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Should the driving situation require and
allow it, you can override the automatic
speed limitation as set by the tire inflation pressure monitoring system by depressing the accelerator pedal fully and
briskly. This will shift the transmission to
a lower gear and accelerate the vehicle
until the accelerator pedal is released
slightly or the top speed for a particular
gear is reached.
Warning!
G
Driving with underinflated or damaged
tire(s) produces worse than normal and unexpected vehicle operational characteristics. Overriding the speed limitation is
potentially dangerous as higher speeds
and quick acceleration, as produced by
your depressing the accelerator pedal fully
and briskly, may intensify adverse vehicle
handling characteristics.
Warning!
G
You should pull over immediately. The vehicle no longer has steering stability and
may skid. Change the wheel.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
Underinflated tires can:
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
adversely affect fuel economy
lead to tire failure from being
overheated
adversely affect handling
characteristics
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
379
Operation
Tires and wheels
Overinflated tires
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire.
Overinflated tires can:
adversely affect handling
characteristics
cause uneven tire wear
be more prone to damage from road
hazards
adversely affect ride comfort
increase stopping distance
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
380
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
( page 387)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
( page 385)
3 Maximum tire load ( page 386)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
( page 387)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material ( page 389)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating ( page 381)
8 Load identification ( page 384)
9 Tire name
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and
tires” ( page 491).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire size designation, load and speed rating
General:
Aspect ratio
Depending on the design standards
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation.
The aspect ratio 2 ( page 381) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height
by section width.
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tire width
Aspect ratio in %
Radial tire code
Rim diameter
Tire load rating
Tire speed rating
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: Temporary spare tires which are
high pressure compact spares designed
for temporary emergency use only.
Tire width
The tire width 1 ( page 381) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
Tire code
The tire code 3 ( page 381) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter
“B” means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR”
in the size designation (for example: 245/
40 ZR 18). For additional information,
see “Tire speed rating” ( page 382).
Rim diameter
The rim diameter 4 ( page 381) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter
is indicated in inches (in).
381
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire load rating
The tire load rating 5 ( page 381) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
( page 386) where the maximum load
associated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
Warning!
G
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR ( page 390) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the
same designation, manufacturer and type
as shown on the original part.
382
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368).
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading
the tires can also result in handling or
steering problems, or brake failure.
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
( page 384).
i
Tire load rating 5 ( page 381) and
tire speed rating 6 ( page 381) are
also referred to as “service description”.
Tire speed rating
The tire speed rating 6 ( page 381)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
i
Tire load rating 5 ( page 381) and
tire speed rating 6 ( page 381) are
also referred to as “service description”.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
At the tire manufacturer’s option,
any tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine
the maximum speed capability of the
tire, the service description for the
tire must be referred to. The service
description is comprised of the tire
load rating 5 ( page 381) and the
tire speed rating 6 ( page 381).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 ( page 381) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed capability.
Any tire with a speed capability
above 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” in the size designation
AND the service description must be
placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y).
The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis
designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186
mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire.
If a service description 5 and 6
( page 381) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed
capability of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
383
Operation
Tires and wheels
All-season and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
1
Q M+S
T
Load identification
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
No specification given: absence of any
text (like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
1
XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
or M+S.for winter tires
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
i
Not all M+S rated tires provide special
winter performance. Make sure the
tires you use show M+S and the
mountain/snowflake.marking on
the tire sidewall. These tires meet
specific snow traction performance
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC)
and have been designed specifically
for use in snow conditions.
384
In addition to tire load rating, special
load information may be molded into
the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating 6
( page 381).
1 Load identification
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry
at a specified pressure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new
tire manufacturer or tire retreader to
mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of
each tire produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or
other safety matters concerning tires and
gives purchasers the means to easily
identify such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire
type code” and “Date of manufacture”.
A tire branding symbol 1 ( page 385)
which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
The manufacturer’s identification
mark 2 ( page 385) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
1
2
3
4
DOT
Manufacturer’s identification mark
Tire size
Tire type code (at the option of the
tire manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four
symbols. For more information on retreaded tires ( page 364).
Tire size
The code 3 ( page 385) indicates the
tire size.
385
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire type code
Maximum tire load
Warning!
The code 4 ( page 385) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368).
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading
the tires can also result in handling or
steering problems, or brake failure.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5
( page 385) identifies the week and
year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first
full week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year.
For example, “3305” represents the 33rd
week of 2005.
1 Maximum tire load rating
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
386
G
For more information on tire load rating
( page 382).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities ( page 370).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure ( page 373) for proper tire inflation.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
387
Operation
Tires and wheels
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
Treadwear Traction
Temperature
200
A
AA
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition
to these grades.
388
Treadwear
Traction
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning!
G
Tire ply material
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
389
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced)
of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
390
Bar
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Another metric unit for air pressure.
There are 14.5038 pounds per square
inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are
100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
A tire branding symbol which denotes
the tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Bead
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR
for the front and rear axle indicated on
the Certification label located on the
driver’s door B-pillar.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The tire bead contains steel wires
wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire
onto the rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or
driven no more than 1 mi (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if
so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without
passengers and cargo.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the Certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Operation
Tires and wheels
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(weight of the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if
applicable, trailer tongue load). It is indicated on Certification label located on
the driver’s door B-pillar.
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the
tire under normal driving conditions.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure -> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There
are 6.9 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 psi; another
metric unit for air pressure is bars. There
are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory
weight, vehicle capacity weight and production options weight.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on placard located on driver’s door
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing
over 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of
those standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb weight
or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
391
Operation
Tires and wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Tire speed rating
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety
matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such
tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”,
“Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”.
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire
manufacturers using government testing
procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Tread
Vehicle capacity weight
Tire load rating
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric
in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
392
Traction
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of
tread remains.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
tires are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a frontto-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire ( page 367).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle
literature portfolio. If none is available,
tires should be rotated every 3000 to
6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner
if necessary, according to the degree of
tire wear. The same rotation (spinning)
direction must be maintained
( page 367).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center
wear on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure, activating the tire inflation
pressure monitor if necessary.
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Only use Genuine Maybach wheel bolts
specified for your vehicle’s rims.
!
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
inflation pressure monitor. Electronic
components are built into the wheel.
Do not use mounting tools in the area
of the valve as they could damage the
electronic components.
To prevent damage or incorrect installation, have the tires changed at
an authorized Maybach Studio.
For information on wheel change, see
the “Practical hints” section ( page 451)
and ( page 466).
393
Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Maybach Studio. This service includes:
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
Addition of cleaning concentrate to
the water of the windshield and
headlamp cleaning system. Add MB
Concentrate “S” to a pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for temperatures
below freezing point ( page 500).
Tire speed rating for winter tires
If you install winter tires, have an authorized Maybach Studio limit the speed of
your vehicle to the speed rating of the
winter tires installed.
When the speed limitation is activated,
the segments up to the set speed limitation are illuminated, for example,
130 mph (210 km/h) as in the illustration
below.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature. A well-charged battery helps to
make sure the engine can be started
even at low ambient temperatures.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Tire change.
Vehicle speed limitation for winter tires in
speedometer
394
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If
the maximum speed for which your tires
are rated is below the speed rating of
your vehicle, you must place a notice to
this effect where it will be seen by the
driver. Such notices are available from
your tire dealer or from any authorized
Maybach Studio.
Operation
Winter driving
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show
the mountain/snowflake.marking on
the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) and have
been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is
the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the ESP® in
winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and
have the same tread design.
Warning!
G
Winter tires with a tread depth under
0.16 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are
no longer suitable for winter operation.
Warning!
i
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware
that the difference in tire characteristics
may very well impair turning stability and
that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized Maybach
Studio.
Snow chains
When using snow chains, the vehicle
should only be driven at vehicle height
Raised ( page 264).
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on
roads without snow.
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP®
( page 110) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the
vehicle‘s traction.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
Using snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
Chains should only be used on the
rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
Use only snow chains that are approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. your authorized Maybach
Studio will be glad to advise you on
this subject.
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
395
Operation
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Maybach Studio, in accordance with the
Maintenance Booklet at the times called
for by the maintenance service indicator
display.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at
the designated times /mileage will result
in vehicle damage not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
Maintenance service indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when your next
maintenance service is due.
Starting approximately 1 month before
your next maintenance service is due,
one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while
you are driving or when you switch on
the ignition (example service A):
'A' SERVICE
IN XXXXX MI
(Canada: IN XXXXX KM)
'A' SERVICE
IN XXX DAYS
'A' SERVICE
IN X DAY
'A' SERVICE DUE NOW
396
The type of maintenance service due is
indicated in the multifunction display:
9
Basic service (A)
´
Extended service (B)
i
Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible
Service System) only (Canada vehicles):
The interval between services
depends on your driving habits.
A gentle driving style, moderate
engine speeds and the avoidance of
short-distance trips will lengthen the
interval between services.
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared after approximately 30 seconds when you switch
on the ignition or when reaching the
maintenance service threshold while
driving.
You can also clear it yourself.
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see
the following message in the multifunction display example service A):
'A' SERVICE
EXCEEDED BY
XXXX MI
(Canada: XXXXX KM)
'A' SERVICE
EXCEEDED BY
XXX DAYS
'A' SERVICE
EXCEEDED BY
X DAY
Calling up the maintenance service indicator display
You can call up the maintenance service
indicator display at any time to check
when the next maintenance service is
due.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display appears in
the multifunction display
( page 173).
Press button k or j until the
maintenance service indicator display
with the service symbol 9 or ´
and the service deadline appear in
the multifunction display.
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
1 Reset button J
Press reset button J 1 on the instru-
ment cluster.
Any authorized Maybach Studio will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance
service.
The maintenance service indicator
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display ( page 173).
397
Operation
Maintenance
i
If the battery is disconnected, the
days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the
maintenance service indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance service
deadline, you will need to subtract
these days from the days shown in
the maintenance service indicator display.
Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator :.
398
Resetting the maintenance service indicator
In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by
an authorized Maybach Studio, you can
have the maintenance service indicator
reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service
will find the information for resetting
the maintenance service indicator in the
maintenance-relevant information for
your vehicle. Such information is available from either your authorized
Maybach Studio or directly from
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
i
If the maintenance service indicator
was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Maybach Studio correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance
service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing
the proper service as called for by the
maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other
vehicle damage not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the
particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning
the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions,
but also by:
near the ocean
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
Tar
during winter operation
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time
to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as
soon as possible to prevent corrosion.
Air pollution
Road salt
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
Grease and oil
Fuel
Coolant
i
Brake fluid
Your authorized Maybach Studio offers a high-end care product case* to
ensure that your Maybach receives
optimal care at all times and at any
location.
Bird droppings
Insects
Tree resins, etc.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
While in operation, even while parked,
your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked,
can attack the paintwork as well as the
vehicle underbody and cause lasting
damage.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a
thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be
re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the
body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production
treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles because of the possibility of
incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
399
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain car-care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles
at an authorized Maybach Studio.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion
or damage due to negligent or incorrect
care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to
seek aid at an authorized Maybach
Studio.
The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as
references to car-care products approved
by us for use on Maybach vehicles.
Refrigerator**
Clean out the refrigerator regularly with
a vinegar-and-water solution. Mix the
solution in a ratio of 1 part vinegar to
10 parts water. Allow the refrigerator to
dry before using it again.
400
Power washer
!
Follow the instructions provided by
the power washer manufacturer on
maintaining a distance between the
vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
Never use a round nozzle to powerwash tires. The intense jet of water
can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
If an outside door handle is hit by a
strong jet of water, and a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft
(approximately 1 m), the vehicle
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove.
A tar remover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components
!
Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or
similar materials to painted body
components may damage the paintwork.
Paint Care approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles should be applied
when water drops on the paint surface
do not “bead up”. This should normally
be done every 3 to 5 months, depending
on climate and washing detergent used.
Paint Cleaner approved for use on
Maybach vehicles should be applied if
the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
Operation
Vehicle care
Do not apply any of these products or
wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or
if the hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate Touch-Up Stick
approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e.
chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical
components and connectors from contact with water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as Anticorrosion Wax approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles, should be applied to
the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should
be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all
pulleys should be protected from any
wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all
traces of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody,
do not forget to clean the inner sides of
the wheels.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
If an outside door handle is hit by a
strong jet of water, and a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft
(approximately 1 m), the vehicle
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Hand-wash
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight.
Only use a mild car wash detergent,
such as Car Shampoo approved by us
for use on Maybach vehicles.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
diffused jet of water.
Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
Rinse with clean water and thorough-
ly dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry
on the finish.
Automatic car wash
You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic car washes without brushes are
preferable.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic
car wash.
!
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold
in exterior rear view mirrors prior to
running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to
the mirrors.
Make sure the windshield wiper
switch is set to 0 ( page 80). Otherwise, the rain sensor could activate
and cause the wipers to move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle
damage.
401
Operation
Vehicle care
i
!
Headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal lenses
After running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off
of the windshield ( page 404). This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield.
Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings. Although ornamental moldings may have chrome
appearance, they could be made of
anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to
clean those ornamental moldings.
Use a mild car wash detergent, such
When leaving the car wash, make
sure the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of ornamental moldings, use a damp cloth.
For very dirty ornamental moldings
of which you are sure are chromeplated, use a chrome cleaner. If in
doubt whether an ornamental molding is chrome-plated, contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
as Car Shampoo approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty
of water.
!
Only use window cleaning solutions
that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which
are not suitable may damage the
plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps.
Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain solvents.
Never apply strong force and only use
a soft, non-scratching cloth when
cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt
to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface.
402
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic** system sensor
cover
!
To prevent scratches or damage, never apply strong force and only use a
soft, non-scratching cloth when
cleaning the sensor cover 1. Do not
attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a
dry cloth or sponge.
Restart the engine after cleaning sen-
sor cover 1.
Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors
1 Distronic system sensor cover
Switch off the ignition ( page 62).
Use a mild car wash detergent, such
as Car Shampoo approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty
of water and a soft, non-scratching
cloth to clean sensors 1 on the
bumpers.
!
Do not apply strong pressure to the
sensor covers. Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by
the power washer manufacturer on
maintaining a distance between the
vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
Use a mild car wash detergent, such
as Car Shampoo approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty
of water and a non-scratching cloth
to clean sensor cover 1.
!
To prevent scratches, never apply
strong force and only use a soft, nonscratching cloth when cleaning the
sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty
sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
1 Parktronic system sensors in front
bumper
403
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning of the Parking Assist System
(PAS) camera lens
The camera is in the license plate recess
next to the handle for the luggage compartment lid.
!
Do not clean the camera and the area
around the camera:
with a high-pressure cleaner
with a dry cloth and high pressure
with aggressive cleaning agents
You could otherwise damage the
camera.
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
!
1 Camera lens
Only clean the camera lens 1 with
clean water and a soft cloth.
Be careful not to apply wax to the
camera lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wax using a mixture of commercially
available car shampoo and water.
The windshield wipers must be in a
vertical position before folding them
away from the windshield. They
could otherwise damage the hood.
Never open the hood when the wiper
arms are folded forward.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II ( page 80).
With wiper arms in vertical position,
switch off the ignition ( page 62).
404
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Make sure the
vehicle’s on board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
Fold the wiper arms forward until
they snap into place.
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win-
dow cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
Operation
Vehicle care
!
!
Plastic and rubber parts
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning
the SmartKey in the starter switch or
pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO**).
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage
the clear coat.
Pour Interior Care approved by us for use
on Maybach vehicles onto a soft lint-free
cloth and apply with light pressure.
Hold on to the wiper when folding
the wiper arm back. If released, the
force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
!
To clean the window interior, do not
use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or
cleaners containing solvents. Do not
touch the inside of the front, rear or
side windows with hard objects such
as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
Light alloy wheels
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
!
The vehicle should not be parked for
an extended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims have
been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks
and brake pads. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should always be
warmed-up before it is parked after
cleaning. To do so, please drive your
vehicle for several minutes to allow
the brakes to dry.
!
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Instrument cluster and front cup holders
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent
or mild detergent for delicate fabrics
as a washing solution.
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a
lukewarm solution.
!
To prevent scratches, do not use
scouring agents.
When applying Tire Care and Wheel
Care products approved by us for use
on Maybach vehicles, take care not to
spray them on the brake disks.
Use Wheel Care approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles, a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water
for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
405
Operation
Vehicle care
Hard plastic trim items
Rear cup holder/bottle holder
Use Interior Care approved by us for
For cleaning purposes, you can push back
the cover plate of the cup holder.
use on Maybach vehicles, a soft, lintfree cloth and apply with light pressure.
Push the cover plate 4 back.
To prevent scratches, do not use
scouring agents.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent
or mild detergent for delicate fabrics
as a washing solution.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor-
Carpets
Use Carpet and Fabric Care approved
by us for use on Maybach vehicles for
cleaning the carpets.
The cup holder opens.
Push one of the release catches 3
upward and, at the same time, press
release catch 1 for the cup/bottle
holder.
!
oughly or clean with Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles.
Press button 2.
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a
lukewarm solution.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1
2
3
4
Release catch for cup/bottle holder
Release catch for cup holder
Release catch for cover plate
Cover plate
!
To prevent scratches, do not use
scouring agents.
After cleaning, close the cup/bottle
holder.
The next time the holder is opened, the
cover plate slides out with it.
406
Operation
Vehicle care
Carefully dab nubuck leather uphol-
Headliner and shelf below rear window
Upholstery
Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham-
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give
off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may
cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats
with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented.
stery with a dry microfiber cloth to remove oil stains.
Leather upholstery
Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck
leather.
poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Roof lining
Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham-
poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Seat belts
Only use clear, lukewarm water and
soap.
!
The webbing must not be treated
with chemical cleaning agents. Do
not dry the webbing at temperatures
above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean
with Leather Care approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles.
Exercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
should not become wet.
!
Do not use Leather Care approved by
us for use on Maybach vehicles on
nubuck leather or any solvents to
clean nubuck leather.
If in doubt about cleaning any nubuck
stain, please consult your Maybach
Studio for assistance.
Wood trims
Dampen cloth using water and use
Nubuck leather
damp cloth to clean wood trims in
your vehicle.
G
The nubuck leather upholstery is treated
with a protective coating.
!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Wipe nubuck leather upholstery with
Warning!
damp microfiber cloth to remove
dust and other light stains.
Do not use solvents like tar remover
or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive.
407
Operation
Vehicle care
Press and pull both switches until you
Electrotransparent roof*
You can lower the inside panel of the
electrotransparent roof.
Warning!
G
Make sure no passengers are sitting in the
rear passenger compartment when the inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is
being lowered. The passengers could otherwise be injured by the panel.
see the message ROOF INSIDE PANEL
UNLOCKED or PRIVALITE ROOF UNLOCKED
appear in the multifunction display.
!
Do not clean the screen! Allow the
cleaned surfaces to dry before closing
the electrotransparent roof.
The inside panel is unlocked.
Push the switch for the electrotrans-
parent roof on the overhead control
panel forward (to open the screen).
Closing the inside panel
After cleaning, pull the switch for the
The inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is lowered and the screen
is opened.
electrotransparent roof on the overhead control panel backward (to
close the screen) until the screen is
completely closed.
Lowering the inside panel
!
Push the inside panel upward until it
engages.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
Make sure the rear passenger compartment is empty and that the inside
panel does not come into contact
with any objects left in the rear compartment.
Make sure the vehicle is stationary
and that the gear selector lever is in
position P.
Pull the switch for the electrotrans-
parent roof on the overhead control
panel backward (to close the screen)
( page 245). At the same time, push
the switch for the rear interior lighting ( page 162).
408
Do not lean against the lowered inside panel.
You can clean the glass panels with a
commercially available glass cleaner
and a moist cloth.
The message disappears from the
multifunction display.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0.
Warning!
G
No passengers may ride in the rear passenger compartment if the inside panel has
not been or cannot be locked. Have the inside panel repaired immediately by an authorized Maybach Studio.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
409
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during
Problem
v
v
Possible cause/consequence
ABS/ESP®
ESP®
The yellow
The
is deactivated.
warning lamp comes on Risk of accident!
while driving.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions.
The yellow ABS/ESP®
warning lamp flashes
while driving.
the lamp self-check when switching on
ignition, have it checked and replaced if
necessary.
Suggested solution
Turn the ESP® back on ( page 111).
If the ESP® cannot be turned back on,
have the system checked at an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
The ESP®, ABS or traction control has come When driving off, apply as little throtinto operation because of detected tractle as possible.
tion loss in at least one tire.
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
Distronic** is deactivated.
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
Do not deactivate the ESP® - exceptions ( page 110).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
The yellow fuel tank re- The fuel level has dropped below the reserve warning lamp
serve mark.
comes on while driving.
410
Refuel at the next gas station
( page 353).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
l
Only vehicles with
You are too close to the vehicle in front of Apply the brakes immediately to inDistronic**: The red dis- you to maintain selected speed.
crease the following distance.
tance warning lamp
comes on while driving.
l
Only vehicles with
You are gaining too rapidly on the vehi- Apply the brakes immediately.
Distronic**: The red discle ahead of you.
Carefully observe the traffic situation.
tance warning lamp
The distance warning system has recogYou may need to brake or maneuver
comes on while driving
nized a stationary obstacle on your
to avoid hitting an obstacle.
and you hear a warning
probable line of travel.
sound.
-
The yellow Antilock
Brake System (ABS) indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and
Continue driving with added caution.
has switched off. The BAS and the ESP® are
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
also switched off (see messages in display).
reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.
Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,
Failure to follow these instructions inother systems such as Parktronic,
Distronic**, the navigation system and the creases the risk of an accident.
automatic transmission can also malfunction.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS has switched off.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
411
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
<
The red seat belt telltale The driver has not fastened his or her seat Fasten your seat belt.
illuminates for a brief
belt.
The telltale goes out.
period after starting the
engine.
H
The yellow warning
lamp for the tire inflation pressure monitor
comes on.
The tire inflation pressure monitor detects Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
a rapid or significant loss of pressure in at
abrupt steering and braking maneuleast one tire.
vers. Observe the traffic situation
around you.
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display.
Warning!
G
When the tire inflation pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
412
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each
tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s
manual.
i
The recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle can be found on
the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap,
not in the owner’s manual.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
1
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence
The red Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)
indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- Drive with added caution to the neartems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
est authorized Maybach Studio.
devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
or fail to activate in an accident.
G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS
is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to
have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or
to others.
413
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
;
(USA only)
3
Possible cause/consequence
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and you hear a
warning sound.
Suggested solution
You are driving with the parking brake set. Release the parking brake
( page 77).
(Canada only)
The red brake warning There is a malfunction in the electro-hy- Read and observe the message in the
lamp comes on when
draulic brake system.
multifunction display ( page 429).
(USA only)
the engine is running
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the veand you hear a warning
3
reservoir.
hicle in a safe location and notify an
(Canada only) sound.
authorized Maybach Studio. Do not
add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
;
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if
the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not
add brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
414
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
?
The yellow engine mal- There is a malfunction in:
function indicator
The fuel management system
lamp comes on while
The ignition system
driving.
±
The emission control system
(Canada only)
Systems which affect emissions
(USA only)
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine to its emergency operation mode.
Your fuel tank is empty.
Suggested solution
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possi-
ble by an authorized Maybach Studio.
An on-board diagnostic connector is used
by the service station to link the vehicle to
the shop diagnostics system. It allows the
accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic
trouble codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the parking
brake pedal.
After refuelling, start, turn off, and re-
start the engine three or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not
need to have your vehicle checked.
i
Some states may by law require you
to visit a workshop immediately as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local requirements.
415
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Lamp
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
The front passenger front airbag
off indicator lamp comes on and
remains illuminated.
A BabySmartTM child seat is
installed on the front passenger
seat. Therefore the passenger front
airbag is switched off.
Suggested solution
The front passenger front airbag The system is malfunctioning.
off indicator lamp comes on and
remains illuminated if there is no
BabySmartTM child seat installed
on the front passenger seat.
Have the system checked as soon as
The front passenger front airbag The system is malfunctioning.
off indicator lamp does not come
on or does not remain illuminated
with a BabySmartTM child seat
properly installed on the front
passenger seat.
Make sure there is nothing between
possible by an authorized Maybach
Studio.
the seat cushion and the child seat.
Check installation of the child seat.
If the light remains out:
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
416
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located
in the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given
in this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
( page 186) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages. If the message
memory menu is not displayed, there are
no messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display with in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display using reset button J ( page 169)
or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
multifunction steering wheel
( page 174).
Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display
using reset button J ( page 169) or
button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
multifunction steering wheel
( page 174). They are then stored in the
vehicle status message memory
( page 186). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions,
such as speed or outside temperature,
warning/ indicator lamps, malfunction/
warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Bring the vehicle to
your authorized Maybach Studio as soon
as possible.
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken
note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an
authorized Maybach Studio.
Failure to repair condition noted may
cause damage not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty, or result in property
damage or personal injury.
417
Practical hints
What to do if …
i
Switching on the ignition causes all
instrument cluster lamps (except high
beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction
display to come on. Make sure the
lamps and multifunction display are
in working order before starting your
journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may
appear in the malfunction display.
High priority messages appear in red
color.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into two sections:
Text messages ( page 419)
Symbol messages ( page 426)
418
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display
ABS
MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The ABS has detected a malfunction
and has switched off. The ESP® and
the BAS are also deactivated.
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is Have the system checked at an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
still functioning normally but without
the ABS available.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP
The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Have the system checked at an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
AIR CLEANER CHANGE CARTRIDGE
The air filter is clogged.
CONVEN. FUNCTIONS
BATTERY
PROTECTION: TEMPORARILY
SHUT OFF
Have the air filter checked by an autho-
rized Maybach Studio.
VISIT WORKSHOP
The battery for electrical consumers
has insufficient voltage and can no
longer supply the convenience functions such as seat ventilation*.
As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient,
you will see the following message in the multifunction display: NOTE: CONVEN. FUNCTIONS
AVAILABLE AGAIN. The electrical consumers are
switched on again.
419
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Distronic** is switched off because: Clean if necessary the Distronic** cover in the
UNAVAILABLE
front bumper ( page 403).
the Distronic** cover in the front
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
bumper is dirty.
Restart the vehicle.
DISTRONIC CURRENTLY
the functionality is impaired due
to heavy rain or thick fog.
or
Distronic** becomes operational again without restarting the engine if:
dirt comes off during driving (e.g. slush or snow)
the system recognizes full sensor availability
(due to lessening rain or the road surface drying)
the message disappears from the multifunction
display
you see the speed last stored blink in the multifunction display for 5 seconds.
You can now use Distronic** normally.
Warning!
G
Distronic** cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off Distronic**
or do not turn it on if the sensor is dirty or
visibility is diminished as a result of snow,
420
rain or fog. The distance control may be
impaired even before the system is able to
detect a dirty sensor. The message
DISTRONIC
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
will be displayed in the multifunction display and Distronic** will be turned off.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
DISTRONIC
ESP
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
EXTERNAL MALFUNCTION
REACTIVATE
Distronic** is switched off and is tem- Try activating Distronic** again later.
porarily unavailable.
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
Distronic** is malfunctioning or the
display is malfunctioning.
MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon
as possible.
®
The ESP is deactivated because of a Continue driving with added caution.
malfunction.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon
as possible.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
still functioning normally but without Failure to follow these instructions increases
the ESP® available.
the risk of accident.
The ABS may still be operational.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP
The ESP® or the ESP® display is malfunctioning.
Continue driving with added caution.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
421
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
ESP
Possible cause/consequence
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
Possible solution
ESP®
The
is deactivated because of in- Synchronize the ESP®: With the vehicle staterrupted power supply.
tionary and the engine running, turn the
steering wheel completely to the left and
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
then to the right.
still functioning normally but without
the ESP® available.
If the ESP® message does not go out:
The ABS may still be operational.
Continue driving with added caution.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
!
When adjusting the ESP®, make sure
you can turn the steering wheel in
both directions as far as it will go
without the wheels hitting any objects (e.g. a curb).
422
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
MOVE SELECTOR LEVER
TO PARK
You have tried to turn off the engine Place the gear selector lever in position P.
with the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button ( page 63) with the gear selector lever not in P.
SRS
FAULT
VISIT WORKSHOP
The system is malfunctioning.
MALFUNCTION
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
One or more main functions of the
Tele Aid system are malfunctioning.
TELE AID
Possible solution
Drive with added caution to the nearest
authorized Maybach Studio.
Have the Tele Aid system checked by an au-
thorized Maybach Studio.
423
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
50 MPH
Canada:
LIMIT
TIRE FAILURE
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The maximum speed is limited to
50 mph (80 km/h).
Pull over immediately. Change the wheel
( page 466).
There was a tire inflation pressure
warning message.
Reactivate the tire inflation pressure moni-
80 KM/H
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATE AFTER
CORRECTING PRESSURE
The yellow warning lamp for the tire
inflation pressure monitor lights up
and you have not reactivated the system since the last tire inflation pressure check.
Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
TIRE PRESSURE
DISPLAY ONLY
AVAILABLE WHEN
IGNITION IS ON
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
424
tor after correcting the tire inflation pressure values ( page 377).
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATED
The tire inflation pressure monitor is using the current pressure values as the basis for monitoring.
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
The tire inflation pressure monitor is
temporarily inoperative because
Remove the additional wheel sen-
an additional wheel sensor is in the
vehicle
the maximum temperature of the
wheel sensor has been exceeded
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed, the tire inflation pressure monitor automatically
becomes active again.
a radio source is causing interference
unrecognized wheel sensors are installed
sor from the vehicle.
The tire inflation pressure monitor or the Have the tire inflation pressure
wheel sensor is malfunctioning.
monitor checked by an authorized
Maybach Studio.
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
NOT OPERATIONAL
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
A wheel without proper sensor was installed.
Warning!
Possible solution
G
Have the wheels checked.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
425
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display
P
AIRMATIC
STOP, CAR TOO LOW
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The vehicle level is too low.
Wait until the vehicle level has been
adjusted.
The message then disappears.
The vehicle level control is malfunctioning. Stop and press the vehicle level control
In addition, the following message apbutton to select a higher vehicle level
pears:
( page 264).
AIRMATIC
VISIT WORKSHOP
Do not turn steering wheel too far to
avoid damaging the front fenders.
Listen for scraping noises.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Visit a service center as soon as possi-
ble.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
AIRMATIC
VISIT WORKSHOP
The Airmatic system has only limited oper- Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
ation.
(80 km/h).
The display for Airmatic or the Airmatic
system itself is malfunctioning.
426
Visit a service center as soon as possi-
ble.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
P
Possible cause/consequence
AIRMATIC
VEHICLE RISING
Your vehicle is adjusting to your level selection.
AIRMATIC
VEHICLE RISING
PLEASE WAIT
The level is too low.
Possible solution
Do not drive off.
The Airmatic has not yet adjusted
the vehicle level to the necessary
height required for driving.
Wait until the message disappears
from the multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
#
BATTERY CHARGE
STOP VEHICLE
The battery, the alternator or the electri- Stop the vehicle in a safe location
cal system control unit is malfunctioning.
as soon as it is safe to do so. Adjust
driving to be consistent with reThe electro-hydraulic brake system reduced braking responsiveness.
quires electrical energy and therefore has
Notify an authorized Maybach
only limited operation. Considerably
Studio.
greater brake pedal force is required and
the stopping distance is increased.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
Read and observe messages about
the electro-hydraulic brake system
in the multifunction display.
427
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
#
BATTERY CHARGE
VISIT WORKSHOP
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The battery is no longer charging.
Stop immediately in a safe location
Possible causes:
alternator malfunctioning
broken poly-V-belt
Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability.
Considerably greater brake pedal force is
required and the stopping distance is
longer.
or as soon as it is safe to do so and
check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
Do not continue to drive. Other-
wise the engine will overheat due
to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the
engine. Notify an authorized
Maybach Studio.
If it is intact:
Drive immediately to the nearest
authorized Maybach Studio. Adapt
driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.
Read and observe messages about
the electro-hydraulic brake system
in the multifunction display.
!
428
RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE
You are driving with the parking brake
engaged.
Release the parking brake
( page 77).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
2
BRAKE PAD WEAR
VISIT WORKSHOP
The brake pads have reached their wear Have the brake pads replaced as
limit.
soon as possible at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
T
BRAKE MALFUNCTION
STOP VEHICLE
The electro-hydraulic brake system is in Stop the vehicle in a safe location
the emergency operation mode. Considas soon as it is safe to do so.
erably greater brake pedal force is re Do not drive any further.
quired and the stopping distance is
Prevent the vehicle from rolling
increased.
away by blocking wheels with
The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph
wheel chocks or another sizable,
(90 km/h).
heavy objects ( page 467).
Call for Roadside Assistance.
;
(USA only)
REDUCED BRAKE PERF.
START ENGINE
3
INCR. STOPPING DIST.
START ENGINE
The battery has insufficient voltage and
cannot supply sufficient power to the
electro-hydraulic brake system.
Start the engine.
The message disappears when sufficient voltage is available.
(Canada only)
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive with at least
one window fully open.
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
inspected by a qualified technician at
the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
429
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
;
Possible cause/consequence
(USA only)
REDUCED BRAKE PERF.
VISIT WORKSHOP
3
INCR. STOPPING DIST.
VISIT WORKSHOP
(Canada only)
Possible solution
The electro-hydraulic brake system is in Continue driving with added cauthe emergency operation mode. Considtion.
erable brake pedal force is required and Adjust driving to be consistent with
the stopping distance is increased.
reduced braking responsiveness.
Drive immediately to the nearest
authorized Maybach Studio.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
BRAKES OVERHEATED
DRIVE CAREFULLY
The brake system is overheated due to an Relieve the load on the brake sysexcessive load on the brakes.
tem.
Drive more smoothly and think
ahead to avoid unnecessary braking.
When driving down slopes, shift
into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power ( page 202).
Cautiously continue driving so that
the air stream will cool down the
brakes.
SERVICE BRAKE
VISIT WORKSHOP
430
There are malfunctions, but the electro- Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
hydraulic brake system is operating noras soon as possible.
mally.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
;
(USA only)
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
There is insufficient brake fluid in the res- Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in
ervoir.
a safe location and notify an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
BRAKE FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP
3
(Canada only)
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
Warning!
G
Driving with the message BRAKE FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP displayed can result in an
accident. Have your brake system checked
immediately.
If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that
the vehicle be transported with all wheels
off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar
must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing
methods and the vehicle requires towing
with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is only permissible for distances up
to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
For more information, refer to “Towing
the vehicle” ( page 478).
If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters
its emergency operation mode, the driver
must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further than normal to obtain braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
Do not add brake fluid before checking
the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid
on hot engine parts and the brake fluid
catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause
the braking system to fail!
431
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
B
COOLANT
CHECK LEVEL
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The coolant level is too low.
Add coolant ( page 361).
If you have to add coolant fre-
quently, have the cooling system
checked by an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without a sufficient
amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage.
432
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Ï
COOLANT
VISIT WORKSHOP
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.
Observe the coolant temperature
gauge ( page 170).
Have the fan replaced as soon as
possible.
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF
The coolant is too hot.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location
and turn off the engine.
Only start the engine again after
the message disappears. You could
otherwise damage the engine.
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may
have leaked into the engine compartment
to catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just by
opening the engine hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).
!
The engine should not be operated
with the coolant temperature above
248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not
covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
433
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Ï
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location
and immediately turn off the engine.
Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
Do not continue to drive. Other-
wise the engine will overheat due
to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the
engine. Notify an authorized
Maybach Studio.
If it is intact:
Restart the engine only after the
message disappears from the multifunction display. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that
is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty.
Observe the coolant temperature
gauge ( page 25).
Drive immediately to the nearest
authorized Maybach Studio.
434
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Î
CRUISE CONTROL
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
Cruise control or Distronic** is malfunctioning.
Have cruise control or Distronic**
±
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP
Certain electronic systems are unable to
relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:
Have the electronic systems
VISIT WORKSHOP
G
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP
Coolant temperature display
Tachometer
Cruise control display
There may be a malfunction in the:
Fuel injection system
Ignition system
Exhaust system
Fuel system
checked by an authorized Maybach
Studio.
checked by an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
as soon as possible.
The displays for several systems have mal- Continue driving with added caufunctioned. Some systems themselves
tion.
may also have malfunctioned.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
V
DOOR OPEN
You are attempting to drive with one or Close the doors.
more doors open.
435
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
VISIT WORKSHOP
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The engine oil has dropped to a critical
level.
Check the engine oil level
( page 357) and add oil as re-
quired.
If you must add engine oil fre-
quently, have the engine checked
for possible leaks.
There is water in the oil.
When the message:
ADD 1.0 QT. OIL
AT FILLING STATION
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
appears while the engine is running and
at operating temperature, the engine oil
level has dropped to approximately the
minimum level.
436
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on
if the oil level drops further.
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious
oil are noted, continue to drive to the
nearest service station where the engine
oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet.
Have the oil checked.
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving
with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
:
ADD 1.0 QT. OIL
AT FILLING STATION
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The engine oil level is too low.
Add engine oil ( page 360) and
check the engine oil level
( page 358).
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
You have added too much engine oil.
Have oil siphoned or drained off.
There is a risk of damaging the engine or
Observe all legal requirements with
the catalytic converter.
respect to its disposal.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
STOP, ENGINE OFF
There is no oil in the engine. There is a
danger of engine damage.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt
as soon as possible.
Turn off the engine.
Add engine oil.
OIL SENSOR MALFUNCT.
VISIT WORKSHOP
The measuring system is malfunctioning. Have the measuring system
checked by an authorized Maybach
Studio.
_
ENTRY POSITION
DO NOT DRIVE
Seat, mirrors and steering wheel have
Wait until the seat, mirrors and
not yet moved to their preset driving posteering wheel have moved to their
sitions.
driving positions.
Y
HOOD OPEN
You are driving with the hood open.
The message will disappear.
Close the hood ( page 356).
437
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
F
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
KEY
CHECK BATTERY
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries ( page 457).
KEY
NOT RECOGNIZED
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is not Stop the vehicle in a safe location
recognized while the engine is running
as soon as it is safe to do so.
because
Search for the SmartKey with
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is
KEYLESS-GO**.
not in the vehicle
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be
centrally locked nor can the engine
there is strong radio-frequency interbe started again after the engine is
ference
stopped.
KEY
NOT RECOGNIZED
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is mo- Change the position of the
mentarily not recognized.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in
the vehicle.
Operate the vehicle with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in
the starter switch if necessary.
438
KEY
STILL IN VEHICLE
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** left in Take the SmartKey with
the vehicle was recognized while locking
KEYLESS-GO** out of the vehicle.
the vehicle from the outside.
AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY
SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or 2. Remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
F
.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.
Remove the SmartKey from the
REPLACE KEY
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
The SmartKey is malfunctioning.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
LIGHT SENSOR
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
The light sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.
REMOVE KEY
starter switch.
as soon as possible.
In the control system, set lamp operation to manual ( page 191).
Switch on headlamps using the ex-
terior lamp switch.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
as soon as possible.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP
The display for the lamps or the system is Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
malfunctioning.
as soon as possible.
TURN OFF LIGHTS
You have removed the SmartKey from
Turn the exterior lamp switch
the starter switch and opened the drivto M ( page 155).
er’s door or removed the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the vehicle and left
the headlamps on.
ACTIVE HDLMP MALF.
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
The active headlamps1 have malfunctioned several times in succession.
ACTIVE HEADLAMPS
UNAVAILABLE
1
The active
ing.
headlamps1
are malfunction-
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
as soon as possible.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
as soon as possible.
If equipped.
439
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
.
HIGH BEAM, LEFT
CHECK LIGHT
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The left high beam flasher lamp is malfunctioning.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
440
HIGH BEAM, RIGHT
CHECK LIGHT
The right high beam flasher lamp is mal- Replace the bulb as soon as possible
functioning.
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
LOW BEAM, LEFT
CHECK LIGHT
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
LOW BEAM, RIGHT
CHECK LIGHT
The right low beam lamp is malfunction- Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
ing.
as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLAMP, LEFT
CHECK LIGHT
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLAMP, RIGHT
CHECK LIGHT
The right front fog lamp is malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible
ing.
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
MIRROR TURN SIG., L
CHECK LIGHT
The left turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
MIRROR TURN SIG., R
CHECK LIGHT
The right turn signal in the side mirror is Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
malfunctioning. This message will only
as soon as possible.
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
as soon as possible.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
.
MARKER LIGHT, FL
CHECK LIGHT
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
MARKER LIGHT, FR
CHECK LIGHT
The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
STANDING LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT
The left front standing lamps are malfunctioning.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
STANDING LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT
The right front standing lamps are malfunctioning.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
1
lamp1
is malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
CORNERING LAMP
LEFT
The left cornering
ing.
CORNERING LAMP
RIGHT
The right cornering lamp1 is malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible
ing.
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL, L
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible
tioning.
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
If equipped.
441
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL, R
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
BRAKE LIGHT LEFT
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
substitute bulb is being used.
as soon as possible.
BRAKE LIGHT RIGHT
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning.
A substitute bulb is being used.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
3RD BRAKE LIGHT
CHECK LIGHT
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
REAR FOGLIGHT
CHECK LIGHT
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
LICENSE PLATE L, L
CHECK LIGHT
The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
as soon as possible.
as soon as possible.
as soon as possible.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE L, R
CHECK LIGHT
The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
( page 459) or visit an authorized
REVERSE LIGHT, LEFT
CHECK LIGHT
The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
REVERSE LIGHT, RIGHT
CHECK LIGHT
The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
as soon as possible.
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
442
as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
STANDING LIGHT, L
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON
The left rear standing lamps are malfunc- Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
as soon as possible.
STANDING LIGHT, R
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON
The right rear standing lamps are malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
STOP LAMP
VISIT WORKSHOP
Brake lamp illumination is delayed or
lamp is permanently on.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
TAIL LIGHT, LEFT
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
substitute bulb is being used.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
TAIL LIGHT, RIGHT
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
substitute bulb is being used.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
REAR TURN SIGNAL, L
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
as soon as possible.
REAR TURN SIGNAL, R
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
<
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
The seat belt system is malfunctioning.
Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
K
CLOSE
SUNROOF
You have opened the driver’s door with Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
the SmartKey removed from the starter
( page 237).
switch and the sliding portion of the tilt/
sliding sunroof open.
.
as soon as possible.
as soon as possible.
as soon as possible.
as soon as possible.
as soon as possible.
as soon as possible.
443
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
J
CLOSE
SUNROOF
You have opened the driver’s door with Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
the SmartKey removed from the starter
( page 237).
switch and the tilting portion of the tilt/
sliding sunroof open.
_
STEERING GEAR OIL
CHECK
The steering oil has dropped to a critical Visit an authorized Maybach Studio
level.
as soon as possible.
L
TELE AID BATTERY
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
The emergency power battery for the
Have the Tele Aid system checked
Tele Aid system is malfunctioning. If the
by an authorized Maybach Studio.
vehicle battery is also discharged, Tele
Aid will not be operational.
TELE AID
NOT ACTIVATED
You do not have a Tele Aid service contract or you have not extended your existing one.
TANK OPEN
CHECK FILLER CAP
A loss of pressure has been detected in
Check the fuel cap ( page 353).
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be If it is not closed properly:
closed properly or the fuel system may be
Close the fuel cap.
leaky.
If it is closed properly:
A
Obtain a Tele Aid service contract
or have your existing one extended
in an authorized Maybach Studio.
Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Maybach Studio.
Ê
TRUNK OPEN
This message will appear whenever the
trunk is open.
Close the trunk.
W
WASHER FLUID
CHECK LEVEL
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3
of total reservoir capacity.
Add washer fluid ( page 363).
444
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
TIRE PRESSURE
PLEASE CORRECT
The pressure is low in one or more tires.
Check and correct tire inflation
pressure as required ( page 375).
TIRE PRESSURE
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
One or more tires is deflating.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
Change the damaged wheel
( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
445
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The tire pressure in one or more tires is al- Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
ready below the minimum value.
avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
situation around you.
low.
TIRE PRESSURE
CHECK TIRES
Check the tires. If no damage visi-
ble, check and correct tire inflation
pressure as required.
If necessary, change the damaged
wheel ( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
446
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
TIRE PRESSURE, LF
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The left front tire is deflating.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
Change the wheel ( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
TIRE PRESSURE, LF
CHECK TIRES
The left front tire inflation pressure is
low.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check the tires. If no damage visi-
ble, check and correct tire inflation
pressure as required ( page 375).
If necessary, change the wheel
( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
447
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
TIRE PRESSURE, RF
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The right front tire is deflating.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
Change the wheel ( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
TIRE PRESSURE, RF
CHECK TIRES
The right front tire inflation pressure is
low.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check the tires. If no damage visi-
ble, check and correct tire inflation
pressure as required ( page 375).
If necessary, change the wheel
( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
448
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
TIRE PRESSURE, LR
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The left rear tire is deflating.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
Change the wheel ( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
TIRE PRESSURE, LR
CHECK TIRES
The left rear tire inflation pressure is low. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check the tires. If no damage visi-
ble, check and correct tire inflation
pressure as required ( page 375).
If necessary, change the wheel
( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
449
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
TIRE PRESSURE, RR
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The right rear tire is deflating.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
Change the wheel ( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
TIRE PRESSURE, RR
CHECK TIRES
The right rear tire inflation pressure is
low.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check the tires. If no damage visi-
ble, check and correct tire inflation
pressure as required ( page 375).
If necessary, change the wheel
( page 466).
Have the damaged wheel repaired
or replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
450
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is stored in the storage
compartment under the front passenger
seat.
!
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage
bowl, spare wheel
The spare wheel, the vehicle tool kit and
the luggage bowl are stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor.
To prevent damage, always disengage trunk floor handle from trunk
edge and lower trunk floor before
closing the trunk.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
1 Tabs
Press tabs 1 together.
Fold the cover forward.
Remove first aid kit.
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
1
2
3
4
5
Wheel chock
Spare wheel
Luggage bowl
Vehicle tool kit
Vehicle jack
One pair of universal pliers
Two open-end wrenches
One hex-socket wrench
One interchangeable slot/Phillips
screwdriver
One towing eye bolt
One wheel wrench
One alignment bolt
One fuse extractor
One fuse chart
Spare fuses
Lift up the trunk floor cover and en-
gage trunk floor handle in upper
edge of trunk.
You can now remove the tools and
accessories.
451
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle
using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**,
open the driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key.
Removing the mechanical key
Unlocking the driver’s door
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
1 Unlocking
i
Unlocking the driver’s door and/or
the trunk with the mechanical key
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm:
Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** in the starter
switch.
The alarm is canceled.
Move locking tab 1 in direction of
arrow.
Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
housing.
452
Insert the mechanical key into the
driver’s door lock until it stops.
Turn the mechanical key counter-
clockwise to position 1.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking and opening the trunk
!
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft
(1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
The trunk lid lock is located next to the
handle above the rear license plate recess.
If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key ( page 137).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle should now be locked.
Turn the mechanical key back and re-
move it from the trunk lid lock.
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, do the following:
Close the front passenger door, the
rear doors and the trunk.
1 Unlocking in an emergency
2 Handle
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock until it stops.
Turn the mechanical key counter-
Press the central locking switch on
the center console ( page 139).
1 Locking
Check to see whether the locking
Insert the mechanical key into the
knobs on the doors have moved
down.
If necessary, push them down manu-
ally.
clockwise to position 1.
Remove the mechanical key out of
the SmartKey ( page 452).
The trunk unlocks.
Check whether the trunk is locked.
driver’s door lock until it stops.
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 1.
The driver’s door is locked.
Pull on handle 2.
The trunk opens.
453
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57)
You can open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.
Remove the SmartKey from the start-
The tilt/sliding sunroof roof drive is located behind the cover on the overhead
control panel.
KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once ( page 84).
er switch.
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**:
Turn off the engine by pressing the
Open the driver’s door (this puts the
starter switch in position 0, same as
with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then
can be closed again.
Pull cover 1 off at the location
marked by the arrow.
1 Cover
2 Crank
454
Remove crank 2 from the Operator’s
Manual pouch.
Insert crank 2 through hole.
Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
slide roof closed
raise roof at the rear
Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
slide roof open
lower roof at the rear
i
Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated manually ( page 239).
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62)
Removing the T-handle crank
The key for emergency operation is
included in the vehicle tool kit.
Operating the power tilt/sliding sunroof
manually
Pull cover 2 off of the rear center in-
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located
behind cover 2 in the roof lining with
the rear passenger compartment instruments.
Insert crank 1 inclined through hole.
strument.
Turn crank 1 clockwise to:
slide roof closed
raise roof at the rear
Turn crank 1 counterclockwise to:
slide roof open
lower roof at the rear
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated manually
( page 244).
1 Vehicle tool kit
2 T-handle crank
3 Pipe key
Open the trunk ( page 131).
1 T-handle crank
2 Cover
Join pieces of T-handle crank 1
together.
Take out vehicle tool kit
( page 451).
Open pouch.
Pull both parts of T-handle crank 2
out of pipe key 3.
455
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** are discharged, the vehicle can only be locked
or unlocked using the mechanical key
( page 452). It is recommended to have
the batteries replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
456
Batteries contain materials that can
harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the
preferred method of disposal. Many
states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
i
When inserting the batteries, make
sure they are clean and free of lint.
i
When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries.
The required replacement batteries
are available at any Maybach Studio.
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
Pull battery compartment 2 out of
the housing in direction of arrow.
Remove the mechanical key out of
the SmartKey ( page 452).
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
batteries 3 under the contact
spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing
up.
Return battery compartment 2 into
the housing until it locks into place.
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey ( page 452).
Check the operation of the SmartKey/
KEYLESS-GO**.
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
Remove the batteries 3.
Insert mechanical key 1 in direction
of arrow in side opening.
Using mechanical key 1, push the
gray slide to unlatch battery compartment 2.
457
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is
therefore essential that all bulbs and
lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps
checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced.
See an authorized Maybach Studio for
headlamp adjustment.
458
i
i
If the headlamps or front fog lamps
are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on
should clear up the fogging.
Substitute bulbs will be brought into
use when the following lamps malfunction:
Rear turn signal lamps
Brake lamps
Rear parking lamps
Tail lamps
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Rear lamps
Type
1 Additional turn
signal and side
marker lamp
LED
2 Turn signal lamp
SAE J573
2357 A
12.8 V-30CP
Lamp
9 High mounted
brake lamp
Type
LED
a License plate lamp C 5 W
3 Side marker lamp W 5 W
4 Low beam and
Xenon2
high beam (active D2S-35 W
headlamps1)
b Brake lamp
Tail, parking and
standing lamp
LED
LED
Side marker lamp LED
Backup lamp
H 24 W
H3 55 W
Rear fog lamp,
driver’s side
LED
5 Fog lamp
6 Cornering lamp1
H3 55 W
Turn signal lamp
LED
7 Parking and
standing lamp
W 5 W Blue
8 High beam flasher H7-55 W
1
2
If equipped.
Bi-Xenon headlamps: For safety reasons
(high voltage), do not replace the Xenon bulb
yourself. See an authorized Maybach Studio.
459
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement
Warning!
G
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can get very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas.
A bulb can explode if you
touch or move it when hot
drop the bulb
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it
is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same
type and with the specified watt rating.
Switch lights off before changing a
bulb to prevent short circuits.
460
Always use a clean lint-free cloth
when handling bulbs.
Your hands should be dry and free of
oil and grease.
If the newly installed bulb does not
come on, visit an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Maybach Studio:
Additional turn signal lamp and
side marker lamp in the exterior
rear view mirrors
Backup lamp
Bi-Xenon lamp
Fog lamps
Rear fog lamp
High mounted brake lamp
Brake lamp
Rear side marker lamp
Rear turn signal lamp
Tail lamp
Rear parking and standing lamp
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
( page 155).
Open the hood ( page 356) (except
for turn signal and side marker
lamps).
1 Housing cover for cornering lamp,
high beam flasher bulb, parking and
standing lamp
2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
3 Bulb socket for side marker
4 Low beam and high beam (Bi-Xenon)
housing cover
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam flasher bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Twist housing cover 1 ( page 460)
Twist housing cover 1 ( page 460)
counterclockwise and pull out.
Twist bulb socket 5 counterclock-
wise and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
5 Bulb socket for high beam flasher
bulb
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp
7 Bulb socket for cornering lamp
Reinsert bulb socket 5 in lamp and
twist clockwise.
counterclockwise and pull out.
Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
Pull the bulb out of the bulb
socket 6.
Insert a new bulb in the socket.
Reinstall bulb socket 6.
Align housing cover 1 and twist
clockwise.
Align housing cover 1 and twist
clockwise.
Low beam and high beam bulbs
Warning!
G
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such
work done by a qualified technician.
461
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Cornering lamps
Twist housing cover 1 ( page 460)
counterclockwise and pull out.
Press bulb holder for cornering
lamp 7 ( page 461) upward and to
the left in direction of arrow.
The bulb holder disengages.
Remove bulb from lamp and pull
white cable out of black cable connector.
Insert cable of new bulb into black ca-
ble connector.
Insert new bulb into lamp and en-
gage bulb holder for cornering
lamp 7 into position.
Align housing cover 1 and twist
clockwise.
462
Front turn signal and side marker lamp
bulb
Turn the wheels so that the wheel at
the housing you need to work on is
turned inward.
This will provide easier access to the
lamp cover.
Secure the vehicle from moving by
applying the parking brake and placing the gear selector lever in
position P.
Make sure the engine and ignition
are turned off.
Warning!
G
Before reaching into the wheel housing,
make sure you have secured the vehicle
from moving by applying the parking
brake and placing the gear selector lever in
position P. Otherwise, the vehicle may
move unexpectedly. Unexpected vehicle
movement while you are working near the
wheel housing may cause serious personal
injury and/or an accident.
8 Cover in the wheel housing trim
Turn cover 8 counterclockwise and
remove cover.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal bulb
Side marker lamp bulb
Twist bulb socket 2 ( page 460)
Twist bulb socket 3 ( page 460)
counterclockwise and pull out.
counterclockwise and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
Reinsert bulb socket 2 in lamp and
twist clockwise.
Replace cover 8 ( page 462) and
turn it clockwise.
License plate lamp
Push bulb into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
Reinsert bulb socket 3 in lamp and
twist clockwise.
Replace cover 8 ( page 462) and
turn it clockwise.
1 Screws
2 License plate lamp
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
( page 155).
Loosen both screws 1.
Remove license plate lamp 2.
Replace the bulb.
Reinstall the license plate lamp 2.
Retighten the screws 1.
463
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
!
To avoid damage to the hood, the
wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position.
With wiper arm in vertical
position 1, turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 0.
Warning!
Removing wiper blades
Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1.
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II ( page 80).
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Make sure the
vehicle’s on board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning a wiper blades.
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Fold the wiper arm forward.
You should hear it snap into place.
Turn the wiper blade at a right angle
to wiper arm.
1 Wiper arm vertical
464
Slide the wiper blade 2 sideways out
of retainer.
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
Slide the wiper blade into the cutout
on the wiper arm.
!
Rotate the wiper blade into position
Hold on to the wiper when folding
the wiper arm back. If released, the
force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
parallel to wiper arm.
Fold the wiper arm back so that blade
rests on windshield. Make sure you
hold on to the wiper when folding
the wiper arm back.
Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a
wiper blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades
are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage.
For your convenience, you should
have this work carried out by an authorized Maybach Studio.
465
Practical hints
Flat tire
i
Preparing the vehicle
Park the vehicle in a safe distance
from moving traffic on a hard, flat
surface when possible.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Open the door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
Have any passenger exit the vehicle
at a safe distance from the roadway.
Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead
position.
Set the parking brake.
Move the gear selector lever to P.
Vehicles with SmartKey:
Turn off the engine ( page 84).
Remove the SmartKey from the start-
er switch.
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**:
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once ( page 85).
Open the driver’s door (this puts the
starter switch in position 0, same as
with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then
can be closed again.
466
Mounting the spare wheel
Warning!
G
If the spare tire is more than 6 years old or
is not the same model as the regular tires,
have the spare tire replaced with a new
tire at the nearest Maybach Studio.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare tire.
Spare wheel
Additional information for 57 S:
The spare wheel rim is mounted with a
full-sized tire of the same type as on the
vehicle, and it is fully functional.
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted
spare wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
When you replace the vehicle’s tires, you
can use the spare wheel as a regular
wheel if:
it is not more than 6 years old
rim and tire are the same model as
the regular wheels
The spare is for temporary use only. When
driving with spare wheel mounted, do not
exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
For more information on spare wheel,
see “Technical data” ( page 491).
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the spare wheel
Lifting the vehicle
Turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise ( page 451).
Remove the spare wheel.
Storing the spare wheel
Place wheel chock 1 and another
Place spare wheel in wheel well and
sizeable suitable object on the
downhill side blocking both
wheels of the axle not being
worked on.
secure it with luggage bowl.
Turn the luggage bowl clockwise to
its stop.
Preparing the vehicle
1 Wheel chock
Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
jack out of trunk.
Take the spare wheel out of wheel
well.
Always try lifting the vehicle using
the jack on a level surface. However,
should circumstances require you to
do so on a hill, place the wheel chock
and the other sizeable, heavy object
as follows:
by blocking wheels with wheel
chock 1 and another sizable suitable
objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
Place wheel chock 1 in front of
and another sizeable suitable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed.
2 Two-piece wheel wrench
Take the two-piece wheel wrench 2
out of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble wheel wrench.
467
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
The tube openings are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in
front of the rear wheel housings.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack support tube
hole built into the vehicle. To help avoid
personal injury, use the jack only to lift the
vehicle during a wheel change. Never get
beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away
from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block
wheels before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the
jack on level surface. Make sure the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack support tube
hole. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working
under the vehicle.
On wheel to be changed, loosen but
do not yet remove the wheel bolts
(approximately one full turn with
wrench).
468
Take ratchet 5 out of vehicle tool
kit.
Place ratchet 5 on jack 3 so that
you can see the letters UP.
Crank ratchet 5 up and down until
the tire is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm)
off the ground.
Warning!
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle.
3 Jack
4 Jack support tube hole
5 Ratchet
Insert jack 3 fully into tube hole 4
up to the stop.
Warning!
G
G
Insert the jack arm fully into the jack support tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise
the vehicle may fall off the jack and cause
personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
Mounting the new wheel
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel
flat against hub and hold it there
while installing first wheel bolt.
Warning!
6 Alignment bolt
Unscrew uppermost wheel bolt and
remove.
Replace this wheel bolt with align-
ment bolt 6 supplied in the tool kit.
Remove the remaining bolts.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or
dirt. This could result in damage to
the bolt and wheel hub threads.
Remove the wheel.
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Maybach Studio or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly
tightened mounting bolts can cause the
wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure you are using the correct
mounting bolts.
Guide the spare wheel onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install
last wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Warning!
G
Use only Genuine equipment Maybach
wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come
loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
469
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle
Place ratchet on jack so that you can
see the letters DOWN.
Lower vehicle by cranking ratchet up
and down until vehicle is resting fully
on its own weight.
Remove the jack.
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are
tight. Observe a tightening torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed, with handle
folded in.
Place the wheel bolt wrench, chock,
1-5
470
Wheel bolts
alignment bolt and jack back in the
trunk.
Replacing jack support tube cover
Slide tongue of cover under the up-
per edge of the tube opening.
Applying even pressure, press cover
until it snaps into place. Be careful
not to damage the locking tabs or
clamp the plastic retaining strap.
!
You can also secure the damaged
wheel down into the spare wheel
well in the trunk.
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor ( page 375) until the
depressurized tire is no longer in the
vehicle.
Practical hints
Batteries
Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
The starter battery (located in the engine compartment)
The battery for electrical consumers
(located in the trunk)
Even though VRLA batteries do not
require topping-up of the electrolyte
level and cannot be opened to check
the electrolyte level, the battery condition must be checked periodically
by performing a battery conductance
test. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for battery condition testing intervals.
4 Cover over positive terminal
5 Battery for electrical consumers
6 Negative terminal
!
1 Negative terminal
2 Starter battery
3 Cover over positive terminal
The consumer battery located in the
trunk is a valve-regulated lead acid
(VRLA) battery, also referred to as
“fleece” battery. Such batteries do
not require topping-up of the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps and the
battery cover is non-removable. Do
not attempt to open the consumer
battery as otherwise the battery will
be damaged.
As with any other battery, disconnect
the consumer battery if you do not
intend to operate your vehicle for an
extended period of time to prevent
battery discharge or connect an accessory battery charge unit expressly
approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles to maintain the battery
charge. Contact an authorized
Maybach Studio for further information.
471
Practical hints
Batteries
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
( page 362).
Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water
and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter
switch. Otherwise the alternator and
other electronic components could
be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly
by an authorized Maybach Studio.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
maintenance intervals or contact an
authorized Maybach Studio for further information.
Warning!
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery
as this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the
risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.
472
Warning!
G
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake
system operation and switch it into its
emergency operation mode. The same applies if battery is disconnected. To brake,
the driver must then apply significantly
greater brake pedal pressure and depress
the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are
only applied to the front wheels. Stopping
distance is increased! Adjust your driving
style accordingly. For more information,
refer to “Electro-hydraulic brake system”
( page 112).
Practical hints
Batteries
Warning!
G
With a disconnected battery
you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button ( page 63) on the gear selector lever will have no effect
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
Disconnecting the batteries
!
Always disconnect the batteries in the
order described below, even if you
only want to charge the starter battery, for example. Otherwise, the vehicle’s electronics could be damaged.
i
Using the Maybach battery charger*
( page 306), it is only possible to
charge or maintain the existing
charge in the battery for electrical
consumers, not the starter battery.
Depress parking brake firmly and
move gear selector lever to position
P.
Turn off the engine ( page 84).
Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions ( page 471).
Remove trunk floor from right hand
side of the trunk.
The consumer battery is located in
the trunk on the right hand side.
Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions ( page 471).
Disconnect negative terminal from
consumer battery.
Open hood.
The starter battery is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger side.
Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions ( page 471).
Disconnect negative terminal of start-
er battery.
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Remove cover from positive terminal.
Remove SmartKey from starter
Disconnect the positive lead of con-
switch.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Open
sumer battery and of the starter battery.
the driver‘s door.
Open the trunk ( page 131).
473
Practical hints
Batteries
Removing the batteries
Swing the bar up and remove bat-
tery.
Removing the consumer battery
Loosen the screws that hold the con-
sumer battery in the trunk in place.
Remove battery’s support and brack-
et.
Pull out the battery ventilation tube
from the battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle
model, the ventilation tube is located
either on the left or right side of the
battery).
Take battery out of trunk.
Removing the starter battery
Loosen the screw that holds the start-
er battery in the engine compartment in place.
Pull out the battery ventilation tube
from the battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle
model, the ventilation tube is located
either on the left or right side of the
battery).
474
the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer.
Charging and reinstalling
the batteries
Warning!
Charge batteries in accordance with
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
G
Never charge a battery while still installed
in the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit* approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles is being used. Gases may
escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit* specially
adapted for Maybach vehicles and tested
and approved by us is available, permitting
the charging of the battery for electrical
consumers in its installed in its installed position. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio for information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the Maybach battery
charger*.
the previously described steps in reverse order.
!
The batteries, their filler caps and the
ventilation tubes must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in
operation.
Practical hints
Batteries
Reconnecting the batteries
!
Always connect the batteries in the
order described below. Otherwise,
the vehicle’s electronics could be
damaged.
!
Never invert the terminal connections.
Reinstall carpet on the right hand
side of the trunk.
Have a Maybach Studio check engine
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Install starter battery in the designat-
ed location in the engine compartment.
Install consumer battery in the desig-
nated location in the trunk.
Attach supports and brackets and
tighten screws.
control units for error messages and
have them erased.
i
The following procedures must be
carried out following any interruption of consumer battery power
(e.g. due to reconnecting):
Set the clock. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Synchronize the ESP®
( page 422).
Synchronize side windows
( page 235).
Synchronize tilt/sliding sunroof
( page 239) or ( page 244).
Connect positive lead of the consum-
er battery and of the starter battery
and fasten covers.
Connect negative lead of the starter
battery in the engine compartment.
Connect negative lead of the con-
Batteries contain materials that can
harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12-volt storage batteries
contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the
preferred method of disposal. Many
states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
sumer battery in the trunk.
475
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water,
and seek medical help if necessary.
If the starter battery is discharged, the
engine can be started with jumper cables
and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
Do not start the engine if the battery
is frozen. Let the battery thaw out
first.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery,
avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
476
Only jump start from batteries with
the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump
starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle‘s electrical system, which will not be
covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or
other parts that move when an engine is started or running.
!
Jump starting should only be performed on the starter battery installed in the engine compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine
using a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have
it checked at the nearest authorized
Maybach Studio.
Excessive unburned fuel generated
by repeated failed starting attempts
may damage the catalytic converter
and may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
Start engine of the vehicle with the
G
charged battery and run at idle
speed.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Connect negative terminal 1 of the
charged battery with negative
terminal 3 of the discharged battery
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable
to charged battery 1 first.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
( page 362).
Jump starting should only be performed
on the starter battery. The starter battery
is located in the engine compartment on
the passenger side.
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
Turn off all electrical consumers, ex-
cept hazard warning flashers or work
lights.
Apply parking brake.
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
Open hood ( page 356).
Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
1 Negative terminal of charged battery
2 Positive terminal of charged battery
3 Negative terminal of discharged battery
4 Positive terminal of discharged battery
Connect positive terminal 2 of the
charged battery with positive
terminal 4 of the discharged battery
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable
to charged battery 2 first.
!
Now you can again turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances.
Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 3 and 1 and
then from positive terminals 4
and 2.
You can now turn on the lights.
Have the starter battery checked at
the nearest authorized Maybach
Studio.
Never invert the terminal connections.
477
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
We recommend that Maybach vehicles
be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate
wheel lift/dolly equipment.
far as necessary to have the vehicle
moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed.
!
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised, the engine must be shut
off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP®
will immediately be engaged and will
apply the rear wheel brakes.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage
radiator and supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis
or suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
( page 117) and the automatic central locking ( page 195).
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on
the ground or front wheels raised only so
478
When towing the vehicle with all
wheels on the ground, the gear selector lever must be in position N and
the SmartKey must be in starter
switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all
wheels on the ground or the front
axle raised, the vehicle may be towed
only for distances up to 30 miles
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h).
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the transmission,
however, we recommend the drive
shaft be disconnected at the rear axle
drive flange for any towing beyond a
short tow to a nearby garage.
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
the engine will not run
there is a malfunction in the electrohydraulic brake system
there is a malfunction in the power
supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately
control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is
in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time,
it can no longer be turned in the switch. In
this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
remove SmartKey from starter switch and
reinsert.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i
To signal turns while being towed
with the hazard warning flasher in
use, switch on the ignition and activate the combination switch for the
left or right turn signal in the usual
manner – only the selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the
hazard warning flasher will operate
again.
Warning!
G
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake
system operation and switch it into its
emergency operation mode. To brake, the
driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the
pedal much further to obtain the expected
braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal.
Brakes are only applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
Adapt your driving style accordingly. For
more information, refer to “Electro-hydraulic brake system” ( page 112).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering system. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
!
To prevent the vehicle door locks
from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking ( page 195).
The vehicle should only be towed using the properly installed towing eye
bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.
i
If the battery is disconnected or discharged:
the SmartKey will not turn in the
starter switch. For information,
see “Batteries” ( page 471) and
“Jump starting” ( page 476)
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
When towing the vehicle with all
wheels on the ground, please note
the following:
With the automatic central locking
activated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO**
start/stop button ( page 63) in
position 2, the vehicle doors lock if
the left front wheel as well as the
right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more.
479
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
Front of vehicle
To remove cover:
Rear of vehicle
Pry off cover 1 using lower recess.
Lift cover off to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop
and tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
Fit cover 1 and snap into place.
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
1 Cover on right side of rear bumper
To remove cover:
Pry off cover 1 using lower recess.
Fold cover down to reveal the thread-
ed hole for towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop
and tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
Fit cover 1 and snap into place.
480
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
Fuses are designed to protect the electrical circuits in your vehicle from a short
circuit. If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and systems secured by that fuse
will stop operating.
The following aids are available to help
you replace fuses ( page 482):
Fuse chart
Spare fuses
Fuse extractor
Warning!
G
Only use fuses approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles and which have the specified amperage for the system in question.
Using other fuses may cause an overload
and lead to a fire, or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems.
!
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Maybach Studio.
Your vehicle’s electrical fuses are located
in various fuse boxes:
In the engine compartment on the
passenger-side ( page 482)
In the engine compartment on the
driver’s side ( page 482)
In the dashboard on the
passenger-side ( page 483)
In the trunk on the driver’s side
( page 483)
!
Keep the fuse boxes free by contamination and wetness. Otherwise, electrical parts or systems could be
damaged.
481
Practical hints
Fuses
Aids for replacing fuses
Fuse chart
The fuse chart is located in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk ( page 451). The
amperages of the fuses are also given
there.
Fuse boxes in engine compartment
There are two fuse boxes located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s and
front passenger side in front of the firewall (dividing wall between engine compartment and passenger compartment).
Spare Fuses
Spare Fuses are located in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk ( page 451).
2 Fuse box cover, passenger-side
Fuse extractor
Opening
The fuse extractor is located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk ( page 451).
Take crank out of vehicle document
pouch.
Loosen retaining screws with crank.
1 Fuse box cover, driver’s side
Remove cover from fuse box.
Closing
Re-attach cover to fuse box.
Make sure the cover fits correctly.
Tighten retaining screws with crank.
482
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment
The fuse box is located in the dashboard
on the front passenger-side.
Opening
Open the passenger door.
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into
Fuse box in the trunk
The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the left-hand trim panel.
the edge of the cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrow.
Loosen cover 1 from dashboard
using lever.
Using your hands, pull cover 1 out
and remove.
Closing
Hook cover 1 into the opening at
the front.
1 Cover
!
Do not use sharp objects such as a
screw driver to open the fuse box
cover 1 in the dashboard, as this
could damage it.
Press cover 1 back on until it engag-
es.
1 Locking knob
2 Trim panel
Opening
Turn locking knob 1 90°.
Pull trim panel 2 upward and
remove it.
Closing
Attach trim panel 2 into the
opening at the top.
Turn locking knob 1 90°.
483
484
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions and weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
485
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides
the necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Maybach Studios maintain a stock of Genuine Maybach Parts
required for maintenance and repair
work. In addition, strategically located
parts distribution centers provide quick
and reliable parts service.
Genuine Maybach Parts are subjected to
stringent quality inspections. Each part
has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Maybach vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Maybach Parts
should be installed.
486
!
The use of non-Genuine Maybach
Parts and accessories not authorized
by us for use on Maybach vehicles
could damage the vehicle, which is
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty, or could compromise the
vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms
of the warranties printed in the Service
and Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Maybach Studio will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emission System Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts,
and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Maybach Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are
available at any Maybach Studio.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Maybach Studio arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
487
Technical data
Identification labels
1 Certification label, includes Paintwork code (on driver’s B pillar)
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(located in the trunk)
3 Engine number (engraved on engine)
4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
5 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
Vacuum line routing diagram label
i
When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine
numbers.
488
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
1
Automatic belt tensioner
2
Power steering pump
3
Air conditioning compressor
4
Crankshaft
5
Coolant pump
6
Generator (alternator)
7
Idler pulley
8
Air conditioning compressor
9
Idler pulley
a
Idler pulley
b
Idler pulley
489
Technical data
Engine
Model
Maybach 57 (240.078) 1
Maybach 57 S (240.079) 1
Maybach 62 (240.178) 1
Engine
285
285
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
12
12
Bore
3.23 in (82.00 mm)
3.25 in (82.60 mm)
Stroke
3.43 in (87.00 mm)
3.66 in (93.00 mm)
364.9 cu in (5980 cm3)
Total piston displacement
336.4 cu in (5513
Compression ratio
9:1
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
543 hp/5250 rpm 2
604 hp/4800-5100 rpm 2
(405 kW/5250 rpm)
(450 kW/4800-5100 rpm)
664 lb-ft/2300–3000 rpm
738 lb-ft/2000–4000 rpm
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
1
2
cm3)
(900 Nm/2300–3000 rpm)
(1000 Nm/2000–4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
5950 rpm
6100 rpm
Firing order
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt
2713 mm
2713 mm
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Maybach Studio for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
490
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
!
!
i
Only use tires which have been and
tested and approved for your vehicle
by us for use on Maybach vehicles.
Tires approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles are developed to
provide best possible performance in
conjunction with the driving safety
systems on your vehicle such as ABS or
ESP®. Tires specially developed for
your vehicle and tested and approved
by us for use on Maybach vehicles can
be identified by finding the following
on the tire’s sidewall:
Using tires other than those approved
by us for use on Maybach vehicles can
have detrimental effects, such as
Further information on tires and rims
is available at any authorized
Maybach Studio. A placard with the
recommended tire inflation pressures
is located on the driver’s door B-pillar
( page 368). Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for driving at high
speeds ( page 374) or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded
vehicle condition ( page 384). If
such information is provided, it can
be found on the placard located on
the inside of the fuel filler flap. The
tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.
MO = Maybach Original equipment tires
Using tires other than those approved
by us for use on Maybach vehicles
may result in damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
poor handling characteristics
increased noise
increased fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may, under load, exhibit
dimensional variations and different
tire deformation characteristics that
could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result.
491
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
Maybach 57
Maybach 57 S
Maybach 62
1
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load)
275/45 R20 110Y XL (Extra Load)
Wheel offset
2.64 in (67 mm)
2.64 in (67 mm)
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x 19
8.5 J x 20
Winter tires1 (radial-ply tires)
275/50 R19 112H XL (Extra Load) M+S.
275/50 R19 112H XL (Extra Load) M+S.
Wheel offset
2.64 in (67 mm)
2.64 in (67 mm)
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x 19
8 J x 19
Maybach 57
Maybach 57 S
Not available as factory equipment.
Spare wheel
Maybach 62
Summer tire (radial-ply tire)
275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load)
275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load)
Wheel offset
2.64 in (67 mm)
2.64 in (67 mm)
Rim (light alloy)
8 J x 19
8 J x 19
492
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Generator (alternator)
14 V/350 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.7 kW
Starter battery
12 V/40 Ah
Electrical consumer battery
12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs
NGK IFR 6 Q-G
Electrode gap
0.028 in (0.7 mm)
Tightening torque
15–22 lb-ft (20–30 Nm)
493
Technical data
Main dimensions and weights
Main dimensions
Model
Maybach 57
Maybach 57 S
Maybach 62
Overall vehicle length
225.5 in (5728 mm)
225.5 in (5728 mm)
242.7 in (6165 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior rear
view mirrors folded out)
84.0 in (2134 mm)
84.0 in (2134 mm)
84.0 in (2134 mm)
Overall vehicle height
61.9 in (1572 mm)
61.3 in (1557 mm)
61.9 in (1573 mm)
Wheelbase
133.5 in (3390 mm)
133.5 in (3390 mm)
150.7 in (3827 mm)
Track, front
65.9 in (1675 mm)
65.9 in (1675 mm)
65.9 in (1675 mm)
Track, rear
66.7 in (1695 mm)
66.7 in (1695 mm)
66.7 in (1695 mm)
Weights
Roof load maximum
no roof load
Trunk load maximum
220 lbs (100 kg)
!
To avoid potential damage to the
roof, solar panel* or electrotransparent roof*, roof rails and any roofmounted devices must not be used.
494
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use
only products and approved by us.
Capacities
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine with oil filter
10.5 US qt (10.0 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear axle
2.1 US qt (2.0 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Power steering
approx. 1.45 (1.65 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs
approx. 0.35 oz (10 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Cooling system
approx. 18 US qt (17.0 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Low temperature cooling system Maybach 57
Maybach 57 S
Maybach 62
approx. 2.3 US qt (2.2 l)
approx. 2.59 US qt (2.45 l)
approx. 2.3 US qt (2.2 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
29.1 US gal (110.0 l)
3.7 US qt (14.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON)
Air conditioning system
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system
1
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
your Maybach Studio.
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
7.1 US qt (6.7 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate 1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios
( page 501).
495
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for
their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore,
only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS
(Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet, or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
!
Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than
those called for by the Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles) will result in engine damage
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
496
Please follow Maintenance System
(U.S vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles)
recommendations. Failure to do so
could result in engine damage not
covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine
oil. They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Maybach Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling
point of the brake fluid is continuously
reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere.
Warning!
G
Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to
the formation of bubbles in the system,
thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s
Maintenance Booklet for replacement
interval.
Only brake fluid approved by us for use
on Maybach vehicles is recommended.
Your authorized Maybach Studio will
provide you with additional information.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
!
Premium unleaded gasoline
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around
gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin
contact, extinguish all smoking materials.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
To maintain the engine’s durability
and performance, premium unleaded
gasoline must be used. If premium
unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:
Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and
fill up with premium unleaded as
soon as possible.
Avoid full throttle driving and
abrupt acceleration.
Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Fuel requirements
Use only premium unleaded fuel
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane
number and the Motor (M) octane
number: (R+M)/2. This is also known
as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA
can be used provided the ratio of any
one of these oxygenates to gasoline does
not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed
15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must
not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol
is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.
These blends must also meet all other
fuel requirements, such as resistance to
spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
497
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by
gasoline. We recommend only the use of
quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake
valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems
such as:
Warm-up hesitation
Unstable idle
Knocking/pinging
Misfire
Power loss
498
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
we recommend only the use of additives
approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Refer to Factory Approved Service
Products Pamphlet for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on
product label.
Do not blend other fuel additives with
fuel. This only results in unnecessary costs
and may be harmful to the engine operation.
Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those
tested and approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles listed in the Factory
Approved Service Products Pamphlet are
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
Corrosion protection
Freeze protection
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately –22°F (–30°C)
and corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
–22°F (–30°C), the boiling point of the
coolant in the pressurized cooling system
is reached at approximately 266°F
(130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase in the boil-over
protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other products approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet) are used to renew
the coolant concentration or bring it
back up to the proper level.
To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45%
anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately –22°F
(–30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze
[freeze protection to approximately
–49°F (–45°C)], the engine temperature
will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore,
do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze
should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for
signs of leakage). Please make sure the
mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must
meet minimum requirements, which are
usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water
quality, consult an authorized Maybach
Studio.
499
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be
specifically formulated to protect the
aluminum parts. (Failure to use such
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service
life).
Therefore, the following product is
strongly recommended for use in your
vehicle: MB 325.0 anticorrosion/
antifreeze agent.
concentration checked. The coolant is
also regularly checked each time you
bring your vehicle to an authorized
Maybach Studio for service.
The anticorrosion/antifreeze quantities
listed in the table below are in relation
to total filling capacity.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Approximately freeze protection
All models (main cooling system)
–35°F (–37°C)
–49°F (–45°C)
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
9.9 US qt (9.4 l)
Maybach 57, Maybach 62 (low temperature cooling system) 1.16 US qt (1.1 l)
1.27 US qt (1.2 l)
Maybach 57 S (low temperature cooling system)
1.37 US qt (1.3 l)
500
1.27 US qt (1.2 l)
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp
washer systems are supplied from the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield and headlamp washer
fluid reservoir has a capacity of approximately 7.1 US qt (6.7 l).
Refill the reservoir with MB Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate and water
(or concentrate and commercially
available pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on
ambient temperatures).
Warning!
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point,
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB Summerfit” and water:
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You can be seriously
burned.
1 part “MB Summerfit” to 100 parts
water
(1.34 floz [40 ml] “MB Summerfit” to
1 gallon [4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point,
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB Summerfit” and commercially available pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
1 part “MB Summerfit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 floz [40 ml] “MB Summerfit” to
1 gallon [4.0 l] solvent)
501
502
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Accessory weight
( page 390)
ADS
(Adaptive Damping System)
Automatically adapts the optimum
suspension damping to prevailing
driving conditions.
Airmatic DC
(Airmatic Dual Control)
Automatically selects the optimum
suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle. Airmatic consists of
three components:
Adaptive Damping System
(->ADS)
Stiffness of spring
Vehicle level control
Air pressure
( page 390)
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a
tire to align the wheel with the wheel
hub.
Aspect ratio
( page 390)
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat.
The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front air bag
when such a seat is properly installed
(PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp located in the center console
comes on and remains illuminated).
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the passenger front air bag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed. See
an authorized Maybach Studio for
availability.
Bar
( page 390)
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking
situations. The system is activated
when it senses an emergency based
on how fast the brake is applied.
Bead
( page 390)
503
Technical terms
Bi-Xenon headlamps
Headlamps which use an electric arc
as a light source and produce a more
intense light than filament headlamps. Bi-Xenon headlamps produce
low beam and high beam.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control
vehicle functions such as door locking
or windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons
and indicator/warning lamps in the
passenger compartment needed for
vehicle operation and monitoring.
Cold tire inflation pressure
( page 390)
504
COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and navigation system, as well as other
equipment (CD changer, telephone,
etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons
on the multifunction steering wheel
to navigate through the system and
to adjust settings.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system that automatically maintains the vehicle
speed set by the driver.
Curb weight
( page 390)
Distronic**
A driving convenience cruise control
system which helps the driver maintain a pre-selected speed:
If there is no vehicle directly
ahead, the system operates in the
same way as conventional ->cruise
control.
If a slower moving vehicle is
ahead, Distronic will reduce your
vehicle speed to the extent permitted by reduced throttle and up
to 20% braking power to maintain the preset minimum following distance.
DOT
(Department of Transportation)
( page 390)
Technical terms
ELCODE
(Electronic Code System)
System that electronically checks
whether a person entering or driving
the vehicle is authorized to do so. It is
part of the Maybach anti-theft protection program.
Electro-hydraulic brake system
Electronically controlled hydraulic
braking system for increased braking
safety and comfort.
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction
(viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without
becoming thin, or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the better the
viscosity.
ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the
system’s threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
FSS (Canada vehicles)
(Flexible Service System)
Maintenance service indicator in the
multifunction display that informs
the driver when the next vehicle
maintenance service is due. FSS evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance
driven and the time elapsed since
your last maintenance service, and
calls for the next maintenance service
accordingly.
GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
( page 390)
Gear range
Number of gears which are available
to the automatic transmission for
shifting. The automatic gear shifting
process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the gear selector lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to
and from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs DVD digital
maps for navigation.
GVW
(Gross Vehicle Weight)
( page 390)
GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
( page 391)
505
Technical terms
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge.
KEYLESS-GO**
System for entering and operating
the vehicle with only carrying the
SmartKey along.
Locking knob
Knob on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the locking knob
down on an individual door from inside will lock that door.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible
gear. This very quickly accelerates the
vehicle and should not be used for
normal acceleration needs.
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)
Maintenance service indicator in the
multifunction display that informs
the driver when the next vehicle
maintenance service is due. The
Maintenance System in your vehicle
tracks distance driven and the time
elapsed since your last maintenance
service, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly.
Kilopascal (kPa)
( page 391)
Maximum load rating
( page 391)
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
( page 391)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
( page 391)
506
Maybach Assistance Center
Maybach customer service center
which can help with any questions
about
operating the vehicle
Maybach products
Maybach services
Maybach Relationship Manager
Your personal contact person at
Maybach Studios for any questions
you might have regarding your
Maybach.
Technical terms
Memory function
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions.
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of
both the MON (Motor Octane Number) and ->RON (Research Octane
Number) is posted at the pump, also
known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Normal occupant weight
( page 391)
Multifunction display
The display field in the instrument
cluster used to present information
provided by the control system.
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking on the tachometer dial. Avoid this
engine speed range, as it may result
in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Parktronic
System which uses visual and acoustic
signals to assist the driver during
parking maneuvers.
PAS
(Parking Assist System)
The PAS is an optical parking aid. It
shows you the area behind the vehicle on the ->COMAND display. In addition, the PAS contains guide lines to
help you with reverse parking and
parallel parking.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator, AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles,
including:
Engine
Clutch/torque converter
Transmission
Transfer case
Drive shaft
Differential
Axle shafts/axles
Production options weight
( page 391)
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard
operation S and comfort
operation C.
507
Technical terms
PSI
(Pounds per square inch)
( page 391)
Recommended tire inflation pressure
( page 391)
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the
engine has been turned off.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags
and child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective
functions complement one another.
Rim
( page 391)
508
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a
gasoline’s ability to resist undesired
detonation (knocking). The average
of both the ->MON (Motor Octane
Number) and RON (Research Octane
Number) is posted at the pump, also
known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission gear selector lever from being moved out of
position P without SmartKey turned/
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
Sidewall
( page 391)
SIM
(Subscriber Identity Module)
Card provided by the GSM telephone
service provider. Necessary for accessing a mobile communication network.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and air bags. Though independent systems, they are closely
interfaced to provide effective occupant protection.
Tele Aid System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and
manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a
subscriber agreement and placing an
acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational
provided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not
damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
Technical terms
Telematics
A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened.
TIN
(Tire Identification Number)
( page 392)
Tire load rating
( page 392)
Tire ply composition and material used
( page 392)
Treadwear indicators
( page 392)
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
( page 392)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
( page 392)
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Vehicle capacity weight
( page 392)
Vehicle level control
The ground clearance of the vehicle is
automatically controlled according to
a selected setting and speed. The
driver can set the ground clearance
manually, for example, on very rough
roads.
Voice control system
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).
Tire speed rating
( page 392)
Traction
( page 392)
Tread
( page 392)
509
510
Index
A
ABS 503
Indicator lamp 25, 107, 411
Messages in display 419
ABS/ESP®
Warning lamp 410
Accelerator position, Automatic
transmission 201
Accessory weight 390
Accident 82
Active headlamps 155
Messages in display 439
Adaptive Damping System see ADS
Additional turn signals 459
ADS 263, 503
Air cleaner see Air filter
Air conditioning refrigerant 495, 496
Air conditioning system see Automatic
climate control
Air conditioning, Cooling 221, 231
Air distribution 216, 230
Air filter
Message in display 419
Air pressure 390
Air recirculation mode 218
Air vents 213, 223, 225
Grille with storage box 282
Air volume 216, 231
Airbags 89
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 101, 503
Children 90
Front 93
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 101, 416
Safety guidelines 92
Side impact 94
Window curtain 94
Airmatic DC 263, 503
Messages in display 426
Setting vehicle level 264
Suspension tuning 263
Alarm system see Anti-theft alarm system
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 451,
469, 503
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 495, 499, 500
Antiglare, Rear view mirrors 206
Antilock Brake System see ABS
Anti-theft alarm systems 115
Immobilizer 115
Indicator lamp 116
Tow-away alarm 117
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Armrest 290
Ashtrays 298
Aspect ratio 390
Audio menu 179
Auto-dimming, Rear view mirrors 206
Automatic central locking 138
Activating/deactivating, Control
system 195
Automatic climate control 212
Air conditioning refrigerant 495, 496
Air conditioning, Cooling 221, 231
Air distribution 216, 230
Air recirculation mode 218
Air vents 213, 223, 225
Air volume 216, 231
Charcoal filter 219
Control panel, Front 214
Control panel, Rear 228
Front defroster 217
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 217
Overview of front passenger
compartment 213
Overview of rear passenger compartment
Maybach 57 224
Maybach 62 226
Rear window defroster 211
Residual engine heat and
ventilation 222
Setting the temperature 216, 229
Automatic headlamp mode 156
511
Index
Automatic lighting control, Interior
lighting 162
Automatic locking when driving 138
Automatic transmission 197
Accelerator position 201
Driving tips 201
Emergency operation, Limp-Home
Mode 205
Gear ranges 202
Gear selector lever position 75, 197,
199
Gear shifting malfunctions 205
Kickdown 201
Manual (One-touch) gearshifting 204
Program mode selector switch 28, 29
Shift program mode selector
switch 203
Transmission fluid level 360
Warning sounds (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO**) 85
AUX sockets 290, 292
512
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 101, 503
Compatible child seats 101, 503
Self-test 101
Backrest
Multicontour seats 148
Power seats 66, 142, 143, 147
Backrest supports
Lumbar region 149
Shoulder region 149
Backup lamps
Replacing bulbs 459
Bar 390
BAS 108, 503
Batteries, SmartKey
Checking battery condition 122
Replacing 456
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
Checking battery condition 128
Replacing 456
Batteries, vehicle 362, 471
Charge socket (Battery for electrical
consumers) 306
Charging 474
Disconnecting 473
For electrical consumers 471
For starter 471
Jump starting 476
Reconnecting 475
Reinstalling 474
Removing 474
Bead 390
Beverage holder see Cup holder
Bi-Xenon headlamps see Headlamps
Bottle holder 296
Brake Assist System see BAS
Brake fluid 496
Brake warning lamp 414
Checking 355
Message in display 431
Brake lamp
High mounted 459
Messages in display 442
Replacing bulbs 459
Brake pads
Message in display 429
Brake warning lamp 25, 414
Brakes 344
Warning lamp 414
Break-in the vehicle 342
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs
Index
C
California retail buyers and lessees, important notice for 11
Can holder see Cup holder
CAN system 504
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants 495
Cargo area see Trunk
Cargo tie-down hooks 280
Carpet, Cleaning and care of 406
Catalytic converter 351
CD changer
Compartment for 290, 292
Central locking
Automatic 195
Locking/unlocking from inside 139
Central locking/unlocking
switches 139, 140
Certification label 488
Champagne flute holder 296
Setting down champagne flutes 297
Charcoal filter 219
Children in the vehicle 98
Airbags 90
BabySmartTM compatible child
seat 101
Blocking of rear window
operation 105
Indicator lamp, PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF 101
Infant and child restraint systems 98
LATCH-type child seat anchors 103
Override switch 105
Tether attachment points 102
Cigarette lighter 299
Clock 172
In the rear 33, 35, 37, 39
Instrument cluster 25
See separate operating instructions
Cloth upholstery, Cleaning and care
of 407
Cockpit 22, 504
COMAND see separate operating instructions
Combination switch 79, 80, 159
Control system 173, 504
Control system menus
Audio menu 179
Distronic** menu 184
Navigation menu 184
Settings 187
Standard display 178
Telephone 181
Trip computer 185
Vehicle status message memory 186
Control system submenus
Convenience 195
Instrument cluster 190
Lighting 191
Vehicle
Controller Area Network see CAN system
Convenience submenu
Setting automatic locking 195
Coolant 361, 499
Adding 361
Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio
and quantity 500
Capacities 495, 500
Checking coolant level 361
Messages in display 432, 433
Temperature 352
Temperature gauge 25, 170
Warning lamp 433
513
Index
Cornering lamp
Messages in display 441
Replacing bulbs 459, 462
Courtesy lighting 168
Cruise control 248, 504
Cruise control lever 256
Cup holder 27, 295
Rear
Cleaning 406
Curb weight 390, 504
Curtains
Partition curtain* 314
Rear side windows* 309
Rear window 307
D
Daytime running lamp mode 157
Setting 191
Deep water see Standing water
Defrosting, Rear 211
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lamps 193
Interior lighting 194
Department of Transportation see DOT
Difficulties
While driving 82
While starting 76
Digital clock see Clock
Digital speedometer 178
514
Dimensions, Vehicle 494
Direction of rotation, Tires 367
Displays
Digital speedometer 178
Maintenance service indicator 396
Messages in display 419
Multifunction display 173
Outside temperature 25, 171
Showing malfunctions 187
Symbol messages 426
Text messages 419
Vehicle status messages 417
Vehicle system settings, Control
system 187
Distance to empty (Range), Trip
computer 186
Distronic** 251, 504
Activating 256
Cleaning system sensor 403
Deactivating 258
Distance warning function** 259
Driving hints 260
Menu 184, 255
Messages in display 421
Sensor cover 403
Warning and indicator lamps 254
Warning sounds 254
Door
Closing the rear doors automatically
from the inside (Maybach 62) 130
Entry lamps 168
Inside door handle 130
Inside door handle, Front 31
Inside door handle, Rear
(Maybach 57) 57
Inside door handle, Rear
(Maybach 62) 58
Locking, SmartKey 86
Locking, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 86
Message in display 435
Opening from inside 130
Power closing assist for doors 138
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 333
Unlocking the driver’s door, Mechanical key 452
Unlocking, SmartKey 60
Unlocking, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 61
Door control panel
In the rear
Maybach 57 57
Maybach 62 58
Index
Door handle
Lock button (KEYLESS-GO**) 86
DOT 390
Drink holder see Cup holder
Drinking and driving 343
Driving 72
Abroad 350
Hydroplaning 347
In winter 349
Instructions 343
Problems 82
Safety systems 107
Systems 248
Through standing water
Tips, Automatic transmission 201
With Distronic** 260
Driving safety systems
ABS 107
BAS 108
Electro-hydraulic brake system 112
ESP® 109, 505
Driving systems
Airmatic DC 263
Cruise control 248
Distronic** 251
Parktronic 267
Vehicle level control 264
DVD player
Compartment for 41, 45, 47, 290, 292
Storage compartment for 43
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 69, 196
ELCODE 505
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Electrical outlets see Power outlets
Electrical system, Technical data 493
Electro-hydraulic brake system 505
Messages in display 429, 430
Self-check 113
Warning lamp 112
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Electrotransparent roof lighting* 167
Electrotransparent roof* 245
Cleaning 408
Lowering panel 408
Making opaque/transparent 246, 247
Opening/closing screen 246, 247
Operating from the cockpit 245
Operating from the rear 246
Operating the screen 30, 245
Emergency calls
Tele Aid calls 327
Emergency operation (Limp-Home
Mode) 205
Emergency operations
Locking/unlocking the vehicle 452
Power tilt/sliding sunroof, Manual
operation 454
Remote door unlock 333
Trunk, Releasing from inside 136
Trunk, unlocking 453
Emergency tensioning device see ETD
Emergency, In case of
Battery, Jump starting 476
First aid kit 451
Flat tire, Changing 466
Fuses 481
Hazard warning flasher 161
Instrument cluster, Indicator
lamps 410
Roadside Assistance 12
Roadside Assistance (Tele Aid) 330
Towing the vehicle 478
Emission control 351
Emission control information label 488
Emission control system warranties 10
515
Index
Engine
Belt layout 489
Cleaning 401
Compartment 356
Malfunction indicator lamp 25, 415
Number 490, 505
Oils 496
Starting with KEYLESS-GO** 63
Starting with SmartKey 62
Tachometer 25
Technical data 490
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO** 85
Turning off with SmartKey 84
Engine coolant see Coolant
Engine oil 357, 496
Adding 360
Additives 496
Changing 496
Checking level 357, 358
Consumption 357
Display messages 437
Filler neck 360
Messages in display 359, 437
Recommended engine oils and oil
filters 496
Viscosity 505
Engine oil level see Oil level
516
ESP® 109, 505
Messages in display 410
Warning lamp 25, 109, 410
ETD 97, 505
Safety guidelines 92
Exterior rear view mirrors 70, 206, 209
Parking position 154, 208
External communication (special order
equipment) 317
F
Filler neck, Engine oil 360
First aid kit 451
Flat tire 466
Jacking up the vehicle 467
Lowering the vehicle 470
Mounting the spare wheel 466
Preparing the vehicle 466, 467
Speed limitation 378
Flexible Service System see FSS
Fluids
Automatic transmission fluid 360
Brake fluid 496
Capacities 495
Engine coolant 361, 495
Engine oil 357, 495, 496
Power steering fluid 495
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system 495, 501
Fog lamps 158, 459
Messages in display 440
Replacing bulbs 459
Folding table* 41, 43, 302
Front airbags 93
Front lamps see headlamps
Front passenger front airbag 93
Front passenger front airbag off indicator lamp 101
Front seat head restraints see Head restraints
FSS (Canada vehicles) 396, 505
Fuel 354
Additives 498
Capacity, Fuel tank 495
Filling the tank 353
Fuel filler flap and cap 353
Fuel reserve warning lamp 25, 410
Premium unleaded gasoline 354
Requirements, Octane rating 497
Fuel filler flap 353
Locking 353
Unlocking 353
Fuel reserve warning lamp 25, 410
Fuel tank
Capacity 495
Filler flap 353
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities 495
Index
Fuse box 483
Fuses 481
Aids for replacing fuses 481
Fuse box in engine compartment 482
Fuse box in passenger
compartment 483
Fuse box in trunk 483
Fuse chart 451
Fuse extractor 451
Replacing 482
Spare fuses 451
G
Garage door opener 30, 335
Gasoline see Fuel
GAWR 390
Gear range 505
Automatic transmission 202
Limiting 202
Shifting into optimal 204
Gear selector lever 75, 197
Cleaning 406
Lock 75
Message in display 423
Position 199
Position indicator 198
Global Positioning System see GPS
Glove box 223, 283
Good visibility 206
GPS 326, 505
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 390
GVWR 391
H
Hands-free microphone 30
Hard plastic trim items, Cleaning 406
Hazard warning flasher 161
Head restraints
Adjusting 142, 143
Front seat 67
Rear seats 141
Headlamp cleaning system 23, 206,
355, 363
Headlamp switch-off delay see Delayed
switch-off, Exterior lamps
Headlamps 156
Automatic headlamp mode 156
Bi-Xenon 459, 504
Cleaning lenses 402
Cleaning system 206, 363, 501
High beam see High beam flasher
High beam see High beam headlamps
Messages in display 439, 440, 441,
442, 443
Replacing bulbs 460
Switch 78
Headliner and shelf below rear window,
Cleaning and care of 407
Headliner lamps and pillar
uplights* 167
Lighting 51, 52
Headphone jacks 41, 43, 45, 47, 290,
292
Headphones
Storage compartments
In rear doors 285, 286
Heated seats 150
Heated steering wheel 318
Lever 23
Height adjustments
Vehicle level 264
High beam flasher 159
High beam headlamps
Indicator lamp 25
Messages in display 440
Switching 79
Switching on 159
High mounted brake lamp 459
Hood 356
Message in display 437
Opening 356
Horn 23
517
Index
HVAC see Automatic climate control
Hydroplaning 347
I
Identification labels 488
Identification Number, Vehicle
(VIN) 488
Ignition 62, 75
Immobilizer 115
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems see
Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure see Tires
Inside door handle 130
Instrument cluster 24, 169, 506
Cleaning 405
Illumination brightness 169
Lamps 410
Messages in display see Multifunction
display
Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster, Illumination brightness
Instrument panel see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Interior lighting
Delayed switch-off 194
Front 162
Rear 163
518
Interior rear view mirror 70
Auto-dimming 206
Interior storage spaces see Storage compartments
J
Jack 451, 468
Jacking up the vehicle 467
Jump starting 476
K
Key, Mechanical 452
Key, SmartKey 60, 120
Battery check lamp 123, 128
Changing the batteries 456
Factory setting 122
Locking/unlocking 60
Locking/unlocking, Global
setting 122
Locking/unlocking, Selective
setting 122
Loss of 124
Messages in display 439
Opening and closing the power tilt/
sliding sunroof 236
Opening and closing the power
windows 236
Opening the trunk 123
Positions in starter switch 62
Remote control 120
Starting the engine 75
Turning off the engine 84
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
Locking/unlocking, Global
setting 127
Key, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 124, 506
Battery check lamp 128
Factory setting 127
Locking the vehicle 129
Locking/unlocking, Global
setting 127
Locking/unlocking, Selective
setting 127
Loss of 129
Messages in display 438
Opening and closing the power tilt/
sliding sunroof 236
Opening and closing the power
windows 236
Opening the trunk 129
Remote control 124
Starting the engine 63
Turning off the engine 85
Kickdown 201, 506
Kilopascal 391
Index
L
Labels 488
Certification 488
Emission control information 488
Vacuum line routing diagram
label 488
Lamp sensor
Message in display 439
Lamps, exterior
Message in display 439
Rear 459
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 25, 411
Anti-theft alarm systems 116
Battery (SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**) 128
Battery (SmartKey) 123
Brakes 25, 414
CHECK ENGINE 415
Coolant 432
Distronic** 25, 254, 411
Electro-hydraulic brake system 112
Engine diagnostics 415
Engine malfunction 25, 415
ESP® 25, 109, 410
Fog lamps 155
Fuel reserve 410
High beam headlamp 25
Instrument cluster 410
Parking lamps 155
Parktronic 269
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 27, 416
Restraint system 25
Seat belt telltale 25
Seat belts 412
SRS 89
Tire inflation pressure 25, 412, 445
Tow away alarm 116
Turn signals 25
Language, Setting 190
LATCH-type child seat anchors see Children in the vehicle
Leather upholstery, Cleaning and care
of 407
Level control
Airmatic DC 266
Level control system
Airmatic DC 263
License plate lamp
Messages in display 442
Replacing bulbs 459, 463
Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 405
Light sensor 439
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
Lighting, Exterior and interior 155
Limp-Home Mode 205
Loading see Vehicle loading
Locator lighting 157
Lock button
Door handle 86
SmartKey 120
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 124
Trunk 129
Locking knob 130, 506
Loss of
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 487
SmartKey 124
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 129
Low beam headlamps 155
Messages in display 440
Replacing bulbs 459
Switching on 78
Lowering
Vehicle 470
Lubricants 495
519
Index
M
Maintenance 12, 396
Calling up service indicator
display 397
Clearing service indicator
message 397
FSS (Canada vehicles) 396
Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) 396
Resetting service indicator 398
Service indicator 396
Service term exceeded 397
Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) 396, 506
Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps
Massage function (PULSE, Multicontour
seats) 149
Maximum load rating, Tires 391
Maximum loaded vehicle weight 391
Maximum tire inflation pressure 391
Maybach Assistance Center 506
Maybach battery charger* 306
Maybach Relationship Manager 506
Maybach 62 with partition*
Storage pocket 39, 290
Maybach 62 without partition*
Storage pocket 290
520
Mechanical key 452
Loss of 124, 129
Memory function 152, 507
Menus see Control system menus
Messages in display see Multifunction
display messages
Microphone
External communication 317
Hands-free 30
Mirrors 70
Adjusting 70
Auto-dimming 206
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position 208
Exterior rear view mirrors 70
Interior rear view mirror 70
Mobile phone see Telephone
MON 354, 507
Motor Octane Number see MON
MP3-CD operation
Selecting tracks 180
Multicontour seats 148, 149
Multifunction display 25, 26, 173, 174,
178, 507
Selecting language 190
Standard display 177, 178
Multifunction display messages 419
ABS 419
Air filter 419
Airmatic DC 426
Battery 419, 427, 428
Brake fluid 431
Brake lamps 442
Brake pads 429
Check engine 415
Coolant 433
Coolant level 432
Cruise control 435
Distronic** 421
Doors 435
Electro-hydraulic brake system 429,
430
Engine oil 358, 436, 437
Engine oil level 437
ESP® 421, 422
Fog lamps 440, 442
Fuel cap 444
Gear selector lever 423
Headlamps 439, 440, 441, 442, 443
Hood 437
Parking brake 428
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57) 443
Seat belts 443
SmartKey 439
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 438
Steering oil 444
Tele Aid 423
Index
Tires 424–425, 445–450
Trunk 444
Washer fluid 444
Multifunction steering wheel 23, 26,
174, 507
Button operation 174
N
Navigation system
Operating 184
See separate COMAND operating instructions
Navigation system DVD drive 293
Neutral gear position 75, 199
New vehicle break-in 342
Night security illumination 157, 193
Non-smokers equipment* 301
Normal occupant weight 391
Number, vehicle identification
(VIN) 488
O
Occupant distribution 391
Occupant safety 88
Airbags 89
Children and airbags 90
Children in the vehicle 98
Fastening the seat belts 72
Infant and child restraint systems 102
LATCH-type child seat anchors 103
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 101
Seat belts 72, 94
Odometer 25, 173
Oil see Engine oil
One-touch gearshifting 204
Operating safety 16
Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 402
Outside microphone 317
Outside temperature indicator 25, 33,
35, 37, 39, 171
Overdue maintenance service 397
Overhead control panel 30
Overspeed range, engine 507
P
Paintwork, Cleaning 400
Panic alarm 106
Panic button 106
Parking 83, 346
Parking Assist System (PAS) 272, 507
Camera 272, 404
Cleaning of the camera lens 404
Parallel parking 276
Parallel parking button 28, 29
Reverse parking (back-in
parking) 275
Switching on 274
Parking brake 83
Message in display 428
Parking lamps 155
Messages in display 441, 443
Replacing bulbs 459, 461
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 154, 208
Gear position 75, 199
Parktronic 267, 507
Activating/deactivating 270
Cleaning system sensors 403
Malfunctioning 271
Minimum distance 268
Range of the sensors 267
Sensors 267
Warning indicator 23, 41, 43, 45, 47,
269
Warning sound 271
Partition* 312
Opening/Closing 313
Parts service 486
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
Indicator lamp 27, 101, 416
Passenger compartment 350
Fuse box 483
Interior rear view mirror 70
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Passenger seat
Adjusting from the rear 57
521
Index
Pedals 343
Plastic and rubber parts, Cleaning 405
Poly-V-belt drive 489, 507
Layout 489
Power assistance 344
Power closing assist for doors and trunk
lid 138
Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors 208
Power outlets 305
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 237
Message in display 443
Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57)
Message in display 443
Opening/closing 237
Opening/closing in an
emergency 454
Stopping 239
Synchronizing 239
Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62)
Message in display 443
Opening/closing 240, 242
Opening/closing in an
emergency 455
Operating from cockpit 241
Operating from the rear passenger
compartment 242
Stopping 242, 244
Synchronizing 244
522
Power train 507
Power washer 400
Power windows 233
Cleaning 404
Operating 233
Rear door window, Blocking
operation 105
Synchronizing 235
Practical hints 410
Premium unleaded gasoline 497
Problems
While driving 82
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Production options weight 391
Program mode selector switch 507
Automatic shift program 203
PSI 391
PULSE function (Massage function) 149
Push-start see Tow-start
R
Radial-ply tires
Summer tires 492
Radio
Selecting stations 179
Selecting stations, Satellite radio
(USA only) 179
Radio transmitters 350
Range (distance to empty) 186
Reading lamps
Front 162
Rear 163
Rear bench seat
Maybach 57 with rear center seat* 44
Maybach 62 with rear center seat* 46
Rear center console 48
Maybach 57 48, 49
Maybach 62 with electrotransparent
roof* 54, 55
Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding
sunroof 51, 52
Rear door windows
Blocking operation 105
Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear passenger compartment
Control panel 32
Maybach 57 32, 34
Maybach 62 36
Maybach 62 with partition* 38
Maybach 62 without partition* 36
Rear seat head restraints see Head restraints
Index
Rear seats 141
Adjusting
Head restraint tilt 141
Adjustment 141
Extending and retracting rear seat
head restraints 145
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window curtain 307
Rear window defroster 211
Recommended tire inflation
pressure 391
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle
(Tele Aid) 334
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 496
Refrigerator** 303
Cleaning 400
Controlling temperature 304
Opening 304
Rear center armrest 290
Switching on/off 304
Refueling 353
Regular checks 355
Remote control
SmartKey 120
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 124
Remote door unlock 333
Remote rear door closing 131
Remote trunk opening/closing
switch 132
Replacing bulbs 458
Additional turn signals 460
Backup bulbs 460
Brake lamp 460
Cornering lamp 462
Fog lamps 460
Front turn signal bulb 463
High beam flasher bulb 461
High mounted brake lamp 460
License plate lamp 463
Parking lamps 461
Side marker bulb 463
Standing lamps 461
Turn signal lamps 459
Reporting safety defects 18
Research Octane Number see RON
Reset button, In instrument
cluster 169, 188
Residual engine heat and
ventilation 222, 508
REST see Residual engine heat and ventilation
Restraint system
See Children in the vehicle
See SRS
Reverse gear position 75, 199
Rims 391, 492
Rims (light alloy) 492
Roadside Assistance 12, 330
RON 354, 508
Rubber parts, Cleaning 405
S
Safety
Driving safety systems 107
Occupant 88
Reporting defects 18
Safety belts see Seat belts
Satellite radio (USA only) 179
Seat belts 94
Children in the vehicle 98
Cleaning 407
Fastening 72
Force limiter 97
Message in display 443
Proper use of 74, 96
Safety guidelines 92
Telltale 25, 412
Warning sounds 94
Seating capacity 369
523
Index
Seats 65
Adjustment 66
Adjustment, Rear seat
(Maybach 57) 141
Adjustment, Rear seat
(Maybach 62) 143
Heating 150
Memory function 153
Multicontour 148
Setting from rear 147
Ventilation* 151
Securing cargo 280
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 101
Tele Aid 326
Service and warranty information 10
Service intervals see Maintenance, Service indicator
Service life, Tires 365
Service see Maintenance
Service system see FSS (Canada vehicles)
or Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)
Service, Parts 486
Settings
Control system menus 177
Control system submenus 177
Factory, SmartKey 122
Factory, SmartKey with
524
KEYLESS-GO** 127
Individual, SmartKey 122
Individual, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 127
Individual, Vehicle 187
Resetting all, Control system 188
Selective, SmartKey 122
Selective, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 127
Shelf below rear window, Cleaning and
care of 407
Shift lock 508
Shift program mode 203
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 199
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission) 204
Side impact airbags 94
Side marker lamps 459
Cleaning lenses 402
Messages in display 441
Replacing bulbs 459, 463
Side windows see Power windows
Sidewall 391
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** see Key,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
Snow chains 395
Snow tires 395
Solar panel* 232
Spare fuses 451
Spare wheel 492
Mounting 466
Speed limitation
With flat tire 378
Speed settings
Cruise control 250
Distronic** 256, 257
Speedometer 25, 253
In the rear 33, 35, 37, 39
SRS 88, 508
Indicator lamp 25, 413
Message in display 423
Standing lamps 155
Replacing bulbs 459
Standing water, Driving through 350
Starter battery 471
Starter switch 23
Positions 62
Starting difficulties, Engine 76
Starting, Engine 74
Steering column 68
Steering gear oil
Message in display 444
Index
Steering wheel 68
Adjusting 68
Buttons 174
Cleaning 406
Heated 318
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 334
Stopping
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57) 239
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62) 242
Windows 235
Storage compartment/drawer
Between the front seats (Maybach 62
with partition*) 287
Storage compartments 282
Armrest, Front 301
Between rear seats 290
For wireless surround sound
headphones 285, 286
Between the front seats (Maybach 62
with partition*) 287
Compartment for the front
telephone 284
For CD changer 290, 292
For DVD player 290, 292
Front doors 285
Glove box 283
Rear center armrest 301
Rear center console 287
Rear doors, Maybach 57 285
Rear doors, Maybach 62 286
Refrigerator** 290
Telephone 284, 290
Under the driver’s seat 286
With navigation system DVD
drive 293
Storage pocket
Maybach 62 with partition* 39, 290
Maybach 62 without partition* 290
Storing tires 366
Submenus see Control system submenus
Summer opening feature 235
Sun visors 210
Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Supplemental Restraint System see SRS
Symbols used in this operator’s
manual 15
T
Tachometer 25, 171
Overspeed range 171
Tail lamps
Cleaning lenses 402
Messages in display 443
Replacing bulbs 459
Tar stains 400
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant 496
Brake fluid 496
Capacities fuels, coolants, lubricants,
etc. 495
Coolant 495, 499
Electrical system 493
Engine 490
Engine oil additives 496
Engine oils 495, 496
Fuel requirements 495, 497
Gasoline additives 498
Main dimensions and weights 494
Premium unleaded gasoline 495, 497
Rims and tires 491
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system 495
Windshield washer system 501
525
Index
Tele Aid 325, 508
Call priority 333
Emergency calls 327
Hands-free microphone 30
Information 331
Initiating an emergency call
manually 328
Messages in display 423
Remote door unlock 333
Roadside Assistance 330
SOS button 328
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 334
System self-check 326
Telematics 509
Telephone 319
Answering/ending a call 183
Compartment in the front 284, 320
Compartment in the rear 290, 292,
323
Hands-free microphone 30
In the front 320
In the rear 323
Operation 319
Phone book 182
Redialing 183
Telephone cradle
Changing 322
526
Temperature
Interior temperature 229
Outside indicator 171
Tether attachment points see Children in
the vehicle
Tie-down hooks, Trunk 280
Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 470
Tilt/sliding sunroof see Power tilt/sliding
sunroof
TIN 392
Tire and Loading Information
Placard 368
Tire and loading terminology 390
Tires 364
Care and maintenance 365
Chains 395
Checking tire inflation pressure 375
Cleaning 366
Direction of rotation 367
Driving instructions 347
Important notes, Tire inflation
pressure 374
Inflation pressure 375
Information placard 369
Inspection 365
Load rating 392
Messages in display 424–425, 445–
450
Ply composition and material
used 392
Problems under-/overinflation 379
Retreads 364
Rims and tires 491
Rotating 393
Service life 365
Sizes 491
Snow 394
Spare wheel 451, 466
Speed rating 348, 382, 392, 394
Storing 366
Temperature 374, 389
Terminology 390
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Traction 348
Tread 392
Tread depth 366, 395
Treadwear indicators 392
Vehicle maximum load on 392
Wear pattern 393
Winter 395
Tools 451
Top tether
Children in the vehicle 102
Tow-away alarm 117
Towing eye bolt 451
Towing the vehicle 478
Tow-start 478
Index
Traction 203, 392
Transmission gear selector lever see
Gear selector lever
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Traveling abroad 350
Tread 392
Tread depth 366
Treadwear indicators 392
Trip computer 185
Trip odometer 171
Trunk
Closing 132, 133
Emergency release 136
Fuse box 483
Lighting 168
Message in display 444
Opening 131, 132
Power closing assist for trunk lid 138
Tie-down hooks 280
Valet locking 137
Trunk lid see Trunk
Tumbler holder see Cup holder
Turn signal lamps
Cleaning lenses 402
Messages in display 442
Replacing bulbs 463
Turning off engine 84
Two-way intercom* 315
Adjusting volume 316
Operating 316
Switching on/off 316
U
Umbrella 293
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards 392
Units, Settings
Speedometer 190
Unleaded gasoline, Premium 354, 495,
497
Upholstery, Cleaning and care of 407
Useful features 281
V
Vacuum line routing diagram label 488
Valet locking 137
Vanity mirror
In the rear 281
In the sun visor 281
Opening/closing 281
Vehicle
Batteries 471
Breaking-in the vehicle 342
Care 399
Control system, Settings menu 187
Dimensions 494
Locking/unlocking 60, 86, 120
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency 452, 453
Lowering 470
Modifications and alterations, Operating safety 16
Towing 478
Washing 401
Weights 494
Vehicle capacity weight 392
Vehicle Identification Number see VIN
Vehicle jack 451, 468
Vehicle level
Setting
Automatic 266
Vehicle level control see Airmatic DC
Vehicle lighting 155, 355
Vehicle loading 280
Cargo tie-down hooks 280
Instructions 280
Load limit 370
Terminology 368, 390
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 392
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen
(Tele Aid) 334
Vehicle status message memory 186
Vehicle tool kit 451
Vehicle washing 401
VIN 509
527
Index
Voice control system 509
Hands-free microphone 30
Lever 23
W
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function** 259
Distronic** 254
Exterior lamps 156
Parking brake 77, 414
Parktronic 271
Seat belt telltale 94
Turning off the engine 84
Warranty coverage 10, 487
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 399
Wear pattern, Tires 393
Weights, Vehicle 494
Wheel
Bolts 470
Change 466
Removing 469
Sizes 381, 492
Spare 451, 466
Tightening torque 470
Tires and wheels 364
528
Window curtain airbags 94
Windows see Power windows
Windshield
Cleaning 81
Cleaning wiper blades 404
Defogging 217
Windshield washer fluid 363
Message in display 444
Mixing ratio 501
Refilling 363, 501
Wiping 81
Windshield wipers 23, 80
Cleaning wiper blades 404
Replacing wiper blades 464
Winter driving 394
Snow chains 395
Tires 395
Winter driving instructions 349
Winter tires 395
Wood trims, Cleaning 407
X
Xenon headlamp see Headlamps
Service and Literature
Your authorized Maybach Studio has trained technicians and original Maybach parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact your authorized Maybach Studio.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Maybach Studio.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Maybach web-site www.maybach-manufaktur.com or www.maybach.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use
of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Maybach Studio.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time August 22, 2005
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany
